EdPsych Modules PDF References

REFERENCES

Aber, J. L., Brown, J. L., & Jones, S. M. (2003). Developmental trajectories toward violence in middle childhood:

Course, demographic differences, and response to school-based intervention. Developmental Psychology, 39,
324

–348. Abrahamsen, E., & Rigrodsky, S. (1984). Comprehension of complex sentences in children at

three levels of cognitive development. Journal of Psycholinguistic Research, 13, 333

–350. Abramowitz, A. J.,

’Leary, S. G., & Futtersak, M. W. (1988).

The relative impact of long and short reprimands on children

‘s off-task behavior in the classroom. Behavior

Therapy, 19, 243

–247.

Acker, M. M., & O

’Leary, S. G. (1987). Effects of reprimands and praise on appropriate social behavior in the

classroom. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 5, 549

–557.

Acton, H. M., & Zabartany, L. (1988). Interaction and performance within groups: Effects on handicapped

and nonhandicapped students

‘ attitudes toward their mildly mentally retarded peers. American Journal of Mental

Retardation, 93, 16

–23.

Adams, J. L. (2001). Conceptual blockbusting (3rd ed.). Cambridge, MA: Perseus.
Adams, L., Kasserman, J., Yearwood, A., Perfetto, G., Bransford,
J., & Franks, J. (1988). The effects of facts versus problem-oriented acquisition. Memory and Cognition, 16,
167

–175. Adams, M. J. (1990). Beginning to read: Thinking and learning about print. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

Adams, R., & Biddle, B. (1970). Realities of teaching. New York:

Holt, Rinehart, & Winston.

Adey, P., & Shayer, M. (1993). An exploration of long-term far-transfer effects allowing an extended intervention

program in the high school science curriculum. Cognition and Instruction, 11(1), 1

–29.

Adler, P. A., & Adler, P. (1998). Peer power: Preadolescent culture and identity. New Brunswick, NJ: Rutgers

University Press. AERA (1999). Standards for educational and psychological testing. Washington, DC: American
Educational Research Association, American Psychological Association, National Council on Measurement in
Education.

Aiken, E. G., Thomas, G. S., & Shennum, W. A. (1975). Memory for a lecture: Effects of notes, lecture rate and

informational density. Journal of Educational Psychology, 67, 439

–444. Ainley, M., Hidi, S., & Berndorf, D. (2002).

Interest, learning, and the psychological processes that mediate their relationship. Journal of Educational Psychology,
94, 545

–561. Airasian, P. (2005). Classroom assessment (5th ed.). New York:

McGraw-Hill.

Albano, A. M., Chorpita, B. F., & Barlow, D. H. (2003). Childhood anxiety disorders. In E. J. Mash & R. A. Barkley

(Eds.), Child psychopathology (2nd ed., pp. 279

–329). New York: Guilford. Albano, A. M., & Krain, A. (2005).

Anxiety and anxiety disorders in girls. In D. J. Bell, S. L. Poster, & E. J. Mash (Eds.), Handbook of behavioral and
emotional problems in girls (pp. 79

–116). New York: Kluwer Academic/Plenum.

Alber, S. R., & Heward, W. L. (2000). Teaching students to recruit positive attention: A review and

recommendations. Journal of Behavioral Education, 10, 177

–204.

Albert, L. (1996). Cooperative discipline. Circle Pines, MN: American Guidance Service.

Alberto, P. A., & Troutman, A. C. (1999). Applied behavior analysis for teachers (5th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ:

Prentice Hall.

Alexander, P. A. (1996). The past, present, and future of knowledge research: A reexamination of the role of

knowledge in learning and instruction. Educational Psychologist, 31, 89

–92.

Algaze, B. (1995). Cognitive therapy, study counseling, and systematic desensitization in the treatment of test

anxiety. In C. Spielberger & P. Vagg (Eds.), Test anxiety: Theory, assessment, and treatment (pp. 133

–152).

Washington, DC: Taylor & Francis.

Allington, R. L. (1980). Teacher interruption behaviors during primary-grade oral reading. Journal of Educational

Psychology, 72, 371

–374.

Allington, R. L. (1983). The reading instruction provided readers of differing reading abilities. Elementary School

Journal, 83, 548

–559.

Allington, R. L. (1984). Content coverage and contextual reading in reading groups. Journal of Reading

Behavior, 16(2), 85

–96.

Althof, W., & Berkowitz, M. W. (2006). Moral education and character education: Their relationship and roles in

citizenship education. Journal of Moral Education, 35, 495

–518.

Amabile, T. M. (1983). The social psychology of creativity. New

York: Springer-Verlag.

Amabile, T. M. (1996). Creativity in context: Update to

―The social psychology of creativity.‖ Boulder, CO: Westview

Press.

Amabile, T. M., DeJong, W., & Lepper, M. (1976). Effects of externally imposed deadlines on intrinsic motivation.

Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 34, 92

–98.

Amabile, T. M., & Hennessey, B. A. (1988). Story-telling: A method for assessing children

‘s creativity.

Journal of Creative Behavior, 22, 235

–246.

Amato, P. R., & Keith, B. (1991). Parental divorce and the well-being of children: A meta-analysis.

Psychological Bulletin, 110(1), 26

–46.

American Association on Mental Retardation (2002). Mental retardation: De

ﬁnition, classiﬁcation, and systems of

supports (10th ed.). Washington, DC: American Association on Mental Retardation.

American Educational Research Association, American Psychological Association, & National Council on

Measurement in Education. (1999). Standards for educational and psychological testing. Washington, DC: AERA.

American Philosophical Association. (1990). Critical thinking: A statement of expert consensus for purposes of

educational assessment and instruction. ED 315

–423.

American Psychiatric Association. (2000). Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders, text revision (4th

ed.). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association.

Ames, C., & Ames, R. (1990). Motivation and effective teaching. In L. Friedman (Ed.), Good instruction:

What teachers can do in the classroom. North Central Regional Education Laboratory.

references

579

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in579 579

10/17/08 10:04:17 AM

REFERENCES

Ames, C., & Archer, J. (1988). Achievement goals in the classroom: Student learning strategies and motivation

processes. Journal of Educational Psychology, 80, 260

–267.

Ames, C. A. (1990). Motivation: What teachers need to know.

Teachers College Record, 91(3), 409

–421.

Ames, C. A. (1992). Classrooms: Goals, structures, and student motivation. Journal of Educational Psychology, 84(3),

261

–271. Ames, R., & Ames, C. (1984). Introduction. In R. Ames & C. Ames

(Eds.), Research on motivation in education. New York: Academic Press.

Amspaugh, L. B. (1975). Teachers

‘ perceptions of various characteristics of ﬁrst grade children and reading group

placement (Doctoral dissertation, Ohio State University, 1974). Dissertation Abstracts International, 35A, 4999.

Anastasi, A., & Urbina, S. (1997). Psychological testing (7th ed.).

Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Anastopoulos, A. D., & Shelton, T. L. (2001). Assessing attention-de

ﬁcit/hyperactivity disorder. New York: Kluwer

Academic/ Plenum.

Anderman, E. M., Greisinger, T., & Wester

ﬁeld, G. (1998). Motivation and cheating during early adolescence.

Journal of Educational Psychology, 90, 84

–93.

Anderman, E. M., & Maehr, M. L. (1994). Motivation and schooling in the middle grades. Review of

Educational Research, 64(2), 287

–309.

Anderman, E. M., & Young, A. J. (1994). Motivation and strategy use in science: Individual differences and classroom

effects. Journal of Research in Science Teaching, 31(8), 811

–831. Andersen, S. M., Klatzky, R. L., & Murray, J.

(1990). Traits and social stereotypes: Ef

ﬁciency differences in social information processing. Journal of Personality

and Social Psychology, 59, 192

–201.

Anderson, C. W., & Smith, E. L. (1987). Teaching science. In

V. Richardson-Koehler (Ed.), Educator

’s handbook: A research perspective (pp. 84–111). New York: Longman.

Anderson, J. R. (1982). Acquisition of cognitive skills. Psychological Review, 89(4), 369

–406.

Anderson, J. R. (1990). Cognitive psychology and its implications

(3rd ed.). New York: Freeman.

Anderson, J. R. (1995). Learning and memory: An integrated approach. New York: Wiley.
Anderson, J. R. (2005). Cognitive psychology and its implications

(6th ed.). New York: Worth.

Anderson, J. R., & Bower, G. H. (1973). Human associative memory. Washington, DC: Winston.
Anderson, L., Evertson, C., & Brophy, J. (1979). An experimental study of effective teaching in

ﬁrst-grade reading

groups. Elementary School Journal, 79, 193

–223.

Anderson, L., & Prawat, R. (1983). Responsibility in the classroom? A synthesis of research on teaching

self-control. Educational Leadership, 419830(7), 62

–66.

Anderson, L. M., Evertson, C. M., & Brophy, J. E. (1979). An experimental study of effective teaching in

ﬁrst grade

reading groups. Elementary School Journal, 79(4), 191

–223.

Anderson, L. W., & Krathwohl, D. R. (Eds.). (2001). A taxonomy for learning, teaching, and assessing: A revision of

Bloom

’s Taxonomy of Educational Objectives. New York: Longman.

Anderson, R. H., & Pavan, B. N. (1993). Nongradedness: Helping it to happen. Lancaster, PA: Technomic.
Anglin, J. (1993). Vocabulary development: A morphological analysis. Monographs of the Society for

Research in Child Development, 58(10), Serial No. 238.

Anthony, L. G., Anthony, B. J., Glanville, D. N., Naiman, D. Q.,

Waanders, C., & Shaffer, S. (2005). The relationships between parenting stress, parenting behaviour, and
preschoolers

‘ social competence and behaviour problems in the classroom. Infant and Child Development, 14,

133

–154.

Apple Classrooms of Tomorrow. (1995). Changing the conversation about teaching, learning & technology: A

report on 10 years of ACOT research. Cupertino, CA: Apple Computer.

Arbreton, A. (1998). Student goal orientation and help-seeking strategy use. In S. Karabnick (Ed.), Strategic help

seeking: Implications for learning and teaching (pp. 95

–116). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Archambault, F. X. Jr., Westberg, K. L., Brown, S. W., Hallmark,

B. W., Emmons, C. L., & Zhang, W. (1993). Regular classroom practices with gifted students: Results of a
national survey of classroom teachers (Research monograph 93102). Storrs, CT: National Research Center on the
Gifted and Talented, University of Connecticut.

Argys, L. M., Rees, D. J., & Brewer, D. J. (1996). Detracking

America

‘s schools: Equity at zero cost? Journal of Policy Analysis and Management, 15(4), 623–645.

Armour-Thomas, E., Bruno, K., & Allen, B. A. (2006). Toward an understanding of higher-order thinking among

minority students. Psychology in the Schools, 29(3), 273

–280.

Aronson, E. (2000). Nobody left to hate: Teaching compassion after Columbine. New York: Worth.

Aronson, E., Blaney, N., Stephan, C., Sikes, J., & Snapp, M.

(1978). The jigsaw classroom. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage.

Aronson, J., Lustina, M. J., Good, C., Keough, K., Steele, C. M., &

Brown, J. (1999). When white men can

‘t do math: necessary and sufﬁcient factors in stereotype threat. Journal of

Experimental Social Psychology, 35(1), 29

–46.

Arter, J., & McTighe, J. (2001). Scoring rubrics in the classroom.

Thousand Oaks, CA: Corwin Press.

Artiles, A. J., Trent, S. C., & Palmer, J. (2004). Culturally diverse students in special education: Legacies and

prospects. In J. A. Banks & C. M. Banks (Eds.), Handbook of research on multicultural education (2nd ed., pp.
716

–735). San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.

Ashcraft, M. H. (2006). Cognition (4th ed.). Upper Saddle River,

NJ: Prentice Hall.

Ashman, A. (1998). Students with intellectual disabilities. In

A. Ashman & J. Elkins (Eds.), Educating children with special needs (3rd ed.). Sydney: Prentice Hall.

Ashton, P., & Webb, R. (1986). Making a difference: Teachers

’ sense of efﬁcacy and student

achievement. New York: Longman.

Ashton, P. T. (1975). Cross-cultural Piagetian research: An experimental perspective. Harvard Educational Review,

45, 475

–506.

Assor, A., Kaplan, H., & Roth, G. (2002). Choice is good but relevance is excellent: Autonomy-enhancing and

suppress-

580

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in580 580

10/17/08 10:04:19 AM

REFERENCES

ing teacher behaviours in predicting students

‘ engagement in school work. British Journal of Educational

Psychology, 72, 261

–278.

Atkeson, B. M., & Forehand, R. (1979). Home-based reinforcement programs to modify classroom behavior: A

review and methodological evaluation. Psychological Bulletin, 9, 814

–820.

Atkinson, R. C., & Shiffrin, R. M. (1968). Human memory: A proposed system and its control processes. In K. W.

Spence &
J. T. Spence (Eds.), The psychology of learning and motivation: Advances in research and theory (Vol. 2). San
Diego, CA: Academic Press.

Atkinson, R. K., Derry, S. J., Renkle, A., & Wortham, D. (2000).

Learning from examples: Instructional principles from the worked examples research. Review of
Educational Research, 70, 181

–214.

Au, K. (1979). Using the experience-text-relationship method with minority children. Reading Teacher, 32(6),

677

–679.

Au, T. K., Sidle, A. L., & Rollins, K. B. (1993). Developing an intuitive understanding of conservation and

contamination: Invisible particles as a plausible mechanism. Developmental Psychology, 29, 286

–299.

Ausubel, D. P. (1963). The psychology of meaningful verbal learning. New York: Grune & Stratton.

Ausubel, D. P. (1968). Educational psychology: A cognitive view.

New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.

Ausubel, D. P. (2000). The acquisition of retention of knowledge:

A cognitive view. Boston: Kluwer Academic.

Baddeley, A. (1999). Essentials of human memory. Philadelphia:

Psychology Press.

Baddeley, A. (2000). Short-term and working memory. In

E. Tulving & F. I. M. Craik (Eds.), The Oxford handbook of memory. New York: Oxford University Press.

Baddeley, A. D. (2001). Is working memory still working? American Psychologist, 56, 851

–864.

Baddeley, A. D., & Hitch, G. J. (1974). Working memory. In G. A.

Bower (Ed.), The psychology of learning and motivation: Advances in research and theory, Vol. 8 (pp. 47

–89). New

York: Academic Press.

Bagwell, C. L., Coie, J. D., Terry, R. A., & Lochman, J. E. (2000).

Peer clique participation and social status in preadolescence. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 46, 280

–305.

Bahrick, H. P. (1984). Semantic memory content in permastore:

50 years of memory for Spanish learned in school. Journal of Experimental Psychology: General, 111, 1

–29.

Bahrick, H. P., Bahrick, P. O., & Wittlinger, R. P. (1975). Fifty years of memory for names and faces. Journal of

Experimental Psychology: General, 104(1), 54

–75.

Baillargeon, R. (1991). Reasoning about the height and location of a hidden object in 4.5- and 6.5-month-old infants.

Cognition, 38, 13

–42.

Baker, L., & Wig

ﬁeld, A. (1999). Dimensions of children‘s motivation for reading and their relations to reading activity

and reading achievement. Reading Research Quarterly, 34, 452

–477.

Baldie, B. (1976). The acquisition of the passive voice. Journal of

Child Language, 3, 331

–348.

Ball, A. F. ( 2002) Three decades of research on classroom life:

Illuminating the classroom communicative lives of America

‘s at-risk students. Review of Research in Education, 26,

–111.

Ball, S. (1995). Anxiety and test performance. In C. Spielberger

& P. Vagg (Eds.), Test anxiety: Theory, assessment, and treatment (pp. 107

–113). Washington, DC: Taylor &

Francis.

Baltes, P. (1987). Theoretical propositions of life-span developmental psychology: On the dynamics between growth

and decline. Developmental Psychology, 23, 611

–626.

Bandura, A. (1977). Self-ef

ﬁcacy: Toward a unifying theory of behavioral change. Psychological Review, 84,

191

–215.

Bandura, A. (1982). Self-ef

ﬁcacy mechanism in human agency.

American Psychologist, 37, 122

–147.

Bandura, A. (1986). Social foundations of thought and action: A social cognitive theory. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:

Prentice Hall.

Bandura, A. (1989). Social cognitive theory. Annals of Child Development, 6, 1

–60.

Bandura, A. (1997). Self

–efﬁcacy: The exercise of control. New

York: Freeman.

Bandura, A. (2000). Exercise of human agency through collective ef

ﬁcacy. Current Directions in Psychological

Science, 9, 75

–78.

Bandura, A. (2001). Social cognitive theory: An agentic perspective. Annual Review of Psychology, 52, 1

–26.

Bandura, A. (2002). Social cognitive theory in cultural context.

Applied Psychology: An International Review, 51, 269

–290.

Bandura, A., & Locke, E. (2003). Negative self-ef

ﬁcacy and goal effects revisited. Journal of Applied Psychology,

88, 87

–99.

Bandura, A., Ross, D., & Ross, S. (1961). Transmission of aggression through imitation of aggressive models.

Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 63, 575

–582.

Bandura, A., & Schunk, D. H. (1981). Cultivating competence, self

–efﬁcacy, and intrinsic interest through

proximal self

– motivation. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 41, 586–598.

Banks, J. A. (2006). Cultural diversity and education: Foundations, curriculum, and teaching (5th ed.).

Boston: Pearson Education.

Banks, J. A., & Banks, C. A. M. (1995). Handbook of research on multicultural education. New York: Macmillan.

Banks, S. A. (2005). Classroom assessment: Issues and practices.

Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

Barker, G., & Graham, S. (1987). Developmental study of praise and blame as attributional cues. Journal of

Educational Psychology, 79, 62

–66.

Barker, R. (1968). Ecological psychology: Concepts and methods for studying the environment of human behavior.

Palo Alto, CA: Stanford University Press.

Barker, R. (1971). Midwest and its children: The psychological ecology of an American town. Hamden, CT: Archon

Books.

Barker, R. G., & Wright, H. F. (1949). Psychological ecology and the problem of psychosocial development.

Child Development, 20(3), 131

–143.

references

581

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in581 581

10/17/08 10:04:21 AM

REFERENCES

Barkley, R. A. (1990). Attention-de

ﬁcit hyperactivity disorder:

A handbook for diagnosis and treatment. New York: Guilford Press.

Barkley, R. A. (1997). Behavioral inhibition, sustained attention, and executive functions: Constructing a unifying

theory of ADHD. Psychological Bulletin, 121(1), 65

–94.

Barkley, R. A. (2003). Attention-de

ﬁcit/hyperactivity disorder.

In E. J. Mash & R. A. Barkley (Eds.), Child psychopathology (2nd ed., pp. 75

–143). New York: Guilford.

Barkley, R. A. (2007). School interventions for attention de

ﬁcit hyperactivity disorder: Where to from here? School

Psychology Review, 36(2), 279

–286.

Barkley, R. A., Shelton, T. L., Crosswait, C., Moorehouse, M.,

Fletcher, K., Barret, S., et al. (2000). Multi-method psycho-educational intervention for preschool children with
disruptive behavior: Preliminary results at post-treatment. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 41,
319

–332.

Barlett, F. C. (1958). Thinking: An experimental and social study.

London: Allen & Unwin.

Barnea, N., & Dori, Y. J. (1999). High school chemistry students

‘ performance and gender differences in a

computerized molecular modeling environment. Journal of Science Education and Technology, 8(4), 257

–271.

Barnes, P. (1995). Personal, social, and emotional development of children. Oxford: Blackwell.
Barnett, M. S., & Ceci, S. J. (2002). When and where do we apply what we learn? A taxonomy for far transfer.

Psychological Bulletin, 128(4), 612

–637.

Barnett, W. S. (2004). Does Head Start have lasting cognitive effects? The myth of fade-out. In E. Zigler & S. J.

Styfco (Eds.), The Head Start debates (pp. 221

–249). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes.

Barnett, W. S., Yarosz, D. J., Thomas, J., Jung, K., & Blanco, D.

(2007). Two-way monolingual English immersion in pre-school education: An experimental comparison.
Early Childhood Research Quarterly, 22(3), 277

–293.

Barone, F. J. (1997). Bullying in school: It doesn

‘t have to happen. Phi Delta Kappan, 79, 80–82.

Barr, H. M., Streissguth, A. P., Darby, B. L., & Sampson, P. D.

(1990). Prenatal exposure to alcohol, caffeine, tobacco, and aspirin: Effects on

ﬁne and gross motor

performance in 4-year-old children. Developmental Psychology, 26, 339

–348.

Barr, R. (1995). What research says about grouping in the past and present and what it suggests about

the future. In
M. Radencich & L. McKay (Eds.), Flexible grouping for literacy in the elementary grades (pp. 1

–24). Needham

Heights, MA: Allyn & Bacon.

Barr, R., & Dreeben, R. (1983). How schools work. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Barrett, S., & Heubeck, B. G. (2000). Relationships between school hassles and uplifts and anxiety and conduct

problems in grades 3 and 4. Journal of Applied Developmental Psychology, 21, 537

–554.

Barron, B. J. S., Schwartz, D. L., Vye, N. J., Moore, A., Petrosino,

A., Zech, L., et al. (1998). Doing with understanding: Lessons from research on problem- and project-based
learning. Journal of the Learning Sciences, 7, 271

–311.

Barron, K. E., & Harackiewicz, J. M. (2000). Achievement goals and optimal motivation: A multiple goals

approach. In
C. Sansone & J. M. Harackiewicz (Eds.), Intrinsic and extrinsic motivation: The search for optimal motivation and
performance (pp. 229

–254). San Diego, CA: Academic Press.

Barrouillet, P., Fayol, M., & Lathulière, E. (1997). Selecting between competitors in multiplication tasks: An

explanation of the errors produced by adolescents with learning disabilities. International Journal of Behavioral
Development, 21, 253

–275.

Basow, S. A., & Rubin, L. R. (1999). Gender in

ﬂuences on adolescent development. In N. G. Johnson, M.

C. Roberts, &
J. Worell (Eds.), Beyond appearance: A new look at adolescent girls (pp. 25

–52). Washington, DC: American

Psychological Association.

Battistich, V., Solomon, D., Kim, D., Watson, M., & Schaps, E.

(1995). Schools as communities, poverty levels of student populations, and students

‘ attitudes, motives,

and performance: A multi-level analysis. American Educational Research Journal, 32, 627

–658.

Battistich, V., Solomon, D., Watson, M., & Schaps, E. (1997). Caring school communities. Educational

Psychologist, 32, 137

–151.

Battistich, V., Watson, M., Solomon, D., Lewis, C., & Schaps, E.

(1999). Beyond the three R

‘s: A broader agenda for school reform. Elementary School Journal, 99(5), 415–432.

Baum, S. M., Renzulli, J. S., & Hebert, T. P. (1995). Reversing underachievement: Creative productivity as a

systematic intervention. Gifted Child Quarterly, 39(4), 224

–235.

Baumann, J. F., Hoffman, J. V., Duffy-Hester, A. M., & Moon Ro,

J. (2000). The

ﬁrst R yesterday and today: U.S. elementary reading instruction practices reported by teachers and

administrators. Reading Research Quarterly, 35, 338

–377.

Baumrind, D. (1966). Effects of authoritative parental control and child behavior. Child Development, 37, 887

–907.

Beal, C. R., & Fleisig, W. E. (1987, April). Preschoolers

‘ preparation for retrieval of object relocation tasks. Paper

presented at the biennial meeting of the Society for Research in Child Development, Baltimore, MD.

Beaman, R., & Wheldall, K. (2000). Teachers

‘ use of approval and disapproval in the classroom. Educational

Psychology, 20, 431

–446.

Bearison, D. J. (1982). New directions in studies of social interactions and cognitive growth. In F. C. Sara

ﬁea (Ed.),

Social-cognitive development in context (pp. 199

–221). New York: Guilford.

Becker, W. C., Madsen, C. H., Arnold, C. R., & Thomas, D. R.

(1967). The contingent use of teacher attention and praise in reducing classroom behavior problems. Journal of
Special Education, 1, 287

–307.

Beelmann, A., P

ﬁngsten, U., & Losel, F. (1994). Effects of training social competence in children: A meta-analysis

of recent evaluation studies. Journal of Clinical Child Psychology, 23, 260

–271.

Beery, R. G. ( 1975). Fear of failure in the student experience.

Personnel Guidance Journal, 54, 190

–203.

Begley, S. (2007). Train your mind, change your brain: How a new science reveals our extraordinary potential to

transform ourselves. New York: Ballantine Books.

582

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in582 582

10/17/08 10:04:23 AM

REFERENCES

Bell, P. A., Fisher, J. D., Baum, A., & Greene, T. C. (1990). Environmental psychology (3rd ed.). New York: Holt,

Rinehart, & Winston.

Bellinger, D., & Needleman, H. L. (1994). Developmental toxicity of methyl mercury. In H. L. Neddleman & D.

Bellinger (Eds.), Prenatal exposure to toxicants: Developmental consequences (pp. 89

–111). Baltimore: Johns

Hopkins University Press.

Belsky, J., Vandell, D. L., Burchinal, M., Clarke-Stewart, K. A.,

McCartney, K., & Owen, M. T. (2007). Are there long-term effects of early child care? Child Development, 78,
681

–701.

Bem, S. L. (1974). The measurement of psychological androgyny.

Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 42, 115

–162.

Bem, S. L. (1975). Sex role adaptability: One consequence of psychological androgyny. Journal of Personality

and Social Psychology, 31, 634

–643.

Benedict, H. (1979). Early lexical development: Comprehension and production. Journal of Child Language, 6,

183

–200.

Benner, S. M. (1998). Special education issues in the context of

American society. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth.

Bereiter, C. (1995). A dispositional view of transfer. In A.

McKeough, J. Lupart, & A. Marini (Eds.), Teaching for transfer: Fostering generalization in learning (pp. 21

–34).

Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Bereiter, C. (1997). Situated cognition and how I overcome it.

In D. Kirshner & J. A. Whitson (Eds.), Situated cognition: Social, semiotic, and psychological perspectives (pp.
281

–300). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Bereiter, C., & Scardamalia, M. (1987). The psychology of written composition. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Bergin, D. A. (1999). In

ﬂuences on classroom interest. Educational Psychologist, 34, 87–98.

Berko Gleason, J., Hay, D., & Cain, L. (1988). Social and affective determinants of language acquisition. In M. L.

Rice &
R. L. Schiefelbusch (Eds.) , The teachability of language (pp. 171

–186). Baltimore: Brookes.

Berkowitz, M. W., & Grych, J. H. (1998). Fostering goodness:

Teaching parents to facilitate children

‘s moral development. Journal of Moral Education, 27, 371–391.

Berkowitz, M. W., Sherblom, S. A., Bier, M. C., & Battistich,

V. (2006). Educating for positive youth development. In M. Killen & J. Smetana (Eds.), Handbook of moral
development. Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Berlin, D., & White, A. (1986). Computer simulations and the transition from concrete manipulation of objects to

abstract thinking in elementary school mathematics. School Science and Mathematics, 86(6), 468

–479.

Berliner, D. C. (1988, February). The development of expertise in pedagogy. Paper presented at the American

Association of Colleges for Teacher Education. New Orleans, LA.

Berndt, T. J. (1982). The features of effects of friendship in early adolescence. Child Development, 53, 1447

–1460.

Berninger, V. W., Mizokawa, D. T., & Bragg, R. (1991). Theory-based diagnosis and remediation of writing

disabilities. Journal of School Psychology, 29, 57

–79.

Bernstein, D. (1989). Language development: The school-age years. In D. Bernstein & E. Tiegerman (Eds.),

Language and
communication disorders in children (2nd ed., pp. 127

–154). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Merrill/Prentice Hall.

Berryman, L., & Russell, D. R. (2001). Portfolios across the curriculum: Whole school assessment in Kentucky.

English Journal, 90, 76

–83.

Betancourt, H., & Lopez, S. R. (1993). The study of culture, ethnicity, and race in American psychology. American

Psychologist, 48, 629

–637.

Bhatnagar, J. K. (1980). Linguistic behavior and adjustment of immigrant children in French and English schools in

Montreal. International Review of Applied Psychology, 2, 141

–158.

Bialystok, E. (2001). Bilingualism in deveopment: Language, literacy, & cognition. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge

University Press.

Biemiller, A. (1977/1978). Relationships between oral reading rates for letters, words, and simple text in the

development of reading achievement. Reading Research Quarterly, 13(2), 223

–253.

Bigge, M. L., & Shermis, S. S. (1999). Learning theories for teachers. New York: Longman.
Bishop, D. (1997). Uncommon understanding: Development and disorders of language comprehension in children.

Hove, East Sussex, UK: Psychology Press.

Bitter, G. G., & Legacy, J. M. (2006). Using technology in the classroom (Brief version). Boston: Allyn & Bacon.
Bjorklund, D. F. (1995). Children

’s thinking: Developmental function and individual differences (2nd ed.). Paciﬁc

Grove, CA: Brooks/Cole.

Bjorklund, D. F., & Pellegrini, A. D. (2000). Child development and evolutionary psychology. Child Development,

71, 1687

–1708.

Black, J. (2003). Environment and development of the nervous system. In M. Gallagher & R. J. Nelson (Eds.),

Handbook of psychology: Vol 3. Biological psychology (pp. 655

–665). Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.

Blakemore, S. J., & Choudhury, S. (2006). Brain development during puberty: State of the science. Developmental

Science, 9, 11

–14.

Blakemore, S. J., & Firth, U. (2005). The learning brain: Lessons for education. Malden, MA; Blackwell.
Blanchett, W. (2006). Disproportionate representation of African American students in special education:

Acknowledging the role of White privilege and racism. Educational Researcher, 35(6), 24

–28.

Bloom, B. S. (1971). Mastery learning. In J. H. Block (Ed.), Mastery learning: Theory and practice. New York: Holt,

Rinehart, & Winston.

Bloom, B. S., Englehart, M. D., Frost, E. J., Hill, W. H., & Krathwohl, D. R. (1956). Taxonomy of educational

objectives. New York: David McKay.

Bloom, L. (1998). Language acquisition in its developmental context. In D. Kuhn & R. S. Siegler (Eds.), W.

Damon (Series Ed.), Handbook of child psychology: Vol. 2. Cognition, perception, and language (5th ed., pp.
309

–370). New York: Wiley.

Blumenfeld, P., Hamilton, V., Bossert, S., Wessels, K., & Meece,

J. (1983). Teacher talk and student thought: Socialization into the student role. In J. M. Levine & M. C. Wang
(Eds.), Teacher

references

583

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in583 583

10/17/08 10:04:25 AM

REFERENCES

and student perceptions: Implications for learning (pp. 143

– 192). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Blumenfeld, P., Pintrich, P., & Hamilton, V. (1986). Children

‘s concepts of ability, effort, and conduct. American

Educational Research Journal, 23, 95

–104.

Blumenfeld, P., Pintrich, P., Meece, J., & Wessels, K. (1982). The formation and role of self-perceptions of ability in

elementary classrooms. Elementary School Journal, 82, 401

–420.

Boekaerts, M. (1995). Self-regulated learning: Bridging the gap between metacognitive and metamotivational

theories. Educational Psychologist, 30(4), 195

–200.

Bohn, C. M., Roehrig, A. D., & Pressley, M. (2004). The

ﬁrst days of school in the classrooms of two more effective

and four less effective primary-grades teachers. Elementary School Journal, 104 (4), 269

–287.

Bong, M., & Skaalvik, E. M. (2003). Academic self-concept and self-ef

ﬁcacy: How different are they really?

Educational Psychology Review, 15, 1

–40.

Bonner, F. A. II. (2000). African American giftedness. Journal of

Black Studies, 30(5), 643

–663.

Boom, J., Brugman, D., & van der Heijden, P. G. M. (2001). Hierarchical structure of moral stages assessed by a

sorting task. Child Development, 72, 535

–548.

Boothroyd, R. A., McMorris, R. F., & Pruzek, R. (1992, April).

What do teachers know about testing and how did they

ﬁnd out? Paper presented at the annual meeting of the

National Council on Measurement in Education, San Francisco, CA.

Borko, H., & Shavelson, R. J. (1990). Teach decision making. In

B. F. Jones & L. Idol (Eds.), Dimensions of thinking and cognitive instruction (pp. 311

–346). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Borland, J. H., & Wright, L. (1994). Identifying young, potentially gifted economically disadvantaged students.

Gifted Child Quarterly, 38, 164

–171.

Bornholt, L. J. (2005). Aspects of self-knowledge about activities: An integrated model of self

–concepts. European

Journal of Psychological Assessment, 21(3), 156

–164.

Botvin, G. J., Grif

ﬁn, K. W., Nichols, T. R. ( 2006). Preventing youth violence and delinquency through a universal

school-based prevention approach. Prevention Science, 7, 403

–408.

Bouffard-Bouchard, T., Parent, S., & Larivee, S. (1991). In

ﬂuence of self-efﬁcacy on self–regulation and

performance among junior and senior high-school age students. International Journal of Behavioral
Development, 14, 153

–164.

Bowlby, J. (1969). Attachment and loss: Vol. 1. Attachment. New

York: Basic Books.

Bowlby, J. (1973). Attachment and loss: Vol. 2. Separation. New

York: Basic Books.

Bowman, L. G., Piazza, C. C., Fisher, W. W., Hagopian, L. P., &

Kogan, J. S. (1997). Assessment of preference for varied versus constant reinforcers. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 30, 451

–458.

Bowman, R., Jr. (1983). Effective classroom management: A primer for practicing professionals.

Clearing House 57(3), 116

–118.

Braaksma, M. A. H., Rijlaarsdam, G., van den Bergh, H., & van

Hout-Wolters, B. H. A. M. (2004). Observational learning and
its effects on the orchestration of writing processes. Cognition and Instruction, 22, 1

–36.

Bradley, R. H., & Caldwell, B. M. (1984). 174 children: A study of the relationship between home environment and

cognitive development during the

ﬁrst 5 years. In A. W. Gottfried (Ed.), Home environment and early cognitive

development: Longitudinal research (pp. 5

–56). San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Brainerd, C. J. (1978). Learning

research and Piagetian theory.

In L. S. Siegel and C. J. Brainerd (Eds.), Alternatives to Piaget: Critical essays on the theory (pp. 69

–109). New

York: Academic Press.

Brainerd, C. J. (2003). Jean Piaget, learning research, and American education. In B. J. Zimmerman & D. H. Schunk

(Eds.), Educational psychology: A century of contributions. Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Bransford, J., Hasselbring, T., Barron, B., Kulweicz, S., Little

ﬁeld,

J., & Goin, L. (1988). Uses of macro-contexts to facilitate mathematical thinking. In R. I. Charles & E.
A. Silver (Eds.), The teaching and assessing of mathematical problem solving. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Bransford, J. D., & Schwartz, D. L. (1999). Rethinking transfer:

A simple proposal with multiple implications. In A. Iran-Nejad & P. D. Pearson (Eds.), Review of
research in education (pp. 61

–100). Washington, DC: American Educational Research Association.

Bransford, J. D., & Stein, B. S. (1993). The IDEAL problem solver:

A guide for improving thinking, learning, and creativity (2nd ed.). New York: Freeman.

Bransford, J. D., Zech, L., Schwartz, D. L., Barron, B. J., Vye, N.,

& Cognition and Technology Group. (2000). Design environments that invite and sustain mathematical
thinking. In
P. Cobb (Ed.), Symbolizing and communicating in mathematics classrooms (pp. 275

–324). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Bredekamp, S., & Rosegrant, T. (1994). Learning and teaching with technology. In J. L. Wright & D. D. Shade
(Eds.), Young children: Active learners in a technological age (pp. 53

–61). Washington, DC: National Association

for the Education of Young Children.

Brener, N. D., Simon, T. R., Krug, E. G., & Lowry, R. (1999). Recent trends in violence related behaviors among

high school students in the United States. Journal of the American Medical Association, 282, 440

–446.

Bretherton, I., & Beeghly, M. (1982). Talking about internal states: The acquisition of an explicit theory of

mind. Developmental Psychology,18, 906

–921.

Bretherton, I., Fritz, J., Zahn-Waxler, C., & Ridgeway, D. (1986).

Learning to talk about emotions: A functionalist perspective. Child Development, 57, 529

–548.

Brisk, M. E. (1991). Toward multilingual and multicultural mainstream education. Journal of Education, 173(2),

114

–129. Britten, J. S., & Cassidy, J. C. (2006). The technology integration assessment instrument: Understanding

planned use of technology by classroom teachers. Computers in Schools, 22(3

–4), 49–61.

Broadbent, D. E. (1958). Perception and communication. London: Pergamon Press.
Brockner, J., & Vasta, R. (1981). Do causal attributions mediate the effects of extrinsic rewards on intrinsic interest?

Journal of Research in Personality, 15, 201

–209.

584

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in584 584

10/17/08 10:04:27 AM

REFERENCES

Bronfenbrenner, U. (1994). Ecological models of human development. International Encyclopedia of Education, 3,

1643

–1647.

Bronfenbrenner, U. (2005). Making human beings human: Bioecological perspectives on human development.

Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.

Bronfenbrenner, U., & Ceci, S. J. (1994). Nature-nurture reconceptualized in developmental perspective: A

bioecological model. Psychological Review, 101, 568

–586.

Brookhart, S. M. (2003). Developing measurement theory for classroom assessment purposes and educational

uses. Educational Measurement Issues and Practice, 22(4), 5

–12.

Brooks, L. W., & Dansereau, D. F. (1987). Transfer of information: An instructional perspective. In S. M. Cormier &

J. D. Hagman (Eds.), Transfer of learning: Contemporary research and applications (pp. 121

–150). New York:

Academic Press.

Brooks-Gunn, J., Han, W. J., & Waldfogel, J. (2002). Maternal employment and child cognitive outcomes in the

ﬁrst three years of life: The NICHD study of early child care. Child Development, 73, 1052–1072.

Brophy, J. (1981). Teacher praise: A functional analysis. Review of Educational Research, 51(1), 5

–32.

Brophy, J. (2006). History of research on classroom management. In C. M. Evertson & C. S. Weinstein (Eds.),

Handbook of classroom management (pp. 3

–43). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Brophy, J., & Evertson, C. (1978). Context variables in teaching.

Educational Psychologist, 12, 310

–316.

Brophy, J., & Good, T. (1974). Teacher

–student relationships:

Causes and consequences. New York: Holt, Rinehart, & Winston.

Brophy, J. E., & Evertson, C. M. (1976). Learning from teaching:

A developmental perspective. Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

Brown, A. (1987). Metacognition, executive control, self

– regulation and other more mysterious mechanisms. In F. E.

Weinert & R. H. Kluwe (Eds.), Metacognition, motivation, and understanding (pp. 65

–116). Hilldale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Brown, A. L., Bransford, J. D., Ferrara, R. A., & Campione, J. C.

(1983). Learning, remembering, and understanding. In J. H. Flavell & E. M. Markman, Handbook of child
psychology: Vol. III, Cognitive development (pp.77

–166). New York: Wiley.

Brown, A. L., Campione, J. C., Webber, L. S., & McGilly, K. (1992).

Interactive learning environments: A new look at assessment and instruction. In B. R. Gifford & M. C.
O

‘Connor (Eds.), Changing assessments: Alternative views of aptitude, achievement, and instruction (pp. 37–75).

Boston: Kluwer Academic.

Brown, A. L., Day, J. D., & Jones R. S. (1983). The development plans for summarizing texts. Child Development,

54, 968

–979.

Brown, A. L., & Ferrara, R. A. (1985). Diagnosing zones of proximal development. In J. V. Wertsch (Ed.), Culture,

communication, and cognition: Vygotskian perspectives (pp. 273

–305). New York: Cambridge University

Press.

Brown, A. L., & Kane, M. J. (1988). Preschool children can learn to transfer: Learning to learn and learning

from example. Cognitive Psychology, 20, 493

–523.

Brown, A. L., & Palincsar, A. S. (1987). Reciprocal teaching of comprehension strategies: A natural history of one

program for enhancing learning. In J. D. Day & J. Borkowski (Eds.), Intelligence and exceptionality: New directions
for theory, assessment and instructional practice (pp. 81

–132). Norwood, NJ: Ablex.

Brown, A. L., & Palincsar, A. S. (1989). Guided, cooperative learning and individual knowledge

acquisition. In L. B. Res-nick (Ed.), Knowing, learning, and instruction: Essays in honor of Robert Glaser (pp.
393

–451). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Brown, B. B. (1990). Peer groups and peer cultures. In S. S. Feldman & Elliot, F. R. (Eds.), At the threshold: The

developing adolescent. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

Brown, B. B. (2004). Adolescents

‘ relationships with peers. In

R. M. Lerner & L. Steinberg (Eds.), Handbook of adolescent psychology (2nd ed., pp. 363

–394). New York: Wiley.

Brown, B. B., & Klute, C. (2006). Friendships, cliques, and crowds. In G. R. Adams & M. D. Berzonsky

(Eds.), Blackwell handbook of adolescence (pp. 330

–348). Oxford: Blackwell. Brown, B. B., Mory, M. S., & Kinney,

D. (1994). Casting adolescent crowds in a relational perspective: Caricature, channel, and context. In R.
Montemayor, G. R. Adams, & T. P. Gullotta (Eds.), Personal relationships during adolescence. Thousand Oaks,
CA: Sage.
Brown, D. F. (2002). Becoming a successful urban teacher. Ports-mouth, NH: Heinemann.

Brown, G. D. A., Preece, T., & Hulme, C. (2000). Oscillator-based memory for serial order. Psychological Review,

107, 127

–181. Brown, J. S., & Burton, R. R. (1978). Diagnostic models for procedural bugs in basic mathematical

skills. Cognitive Science, 2(2), 155

–192.

Brown, J. S., Collins, A., & Duguid, P. (1989). Situated cognition and the culture of learning. Educational

Researcher, 18(1), 32

–42.

Brown, R. (1973). A

ﬁrst language: The early stages. Cambridge,

MA: Harvard University Press.

Brown, R., & Bellugi, U. (1964). Three processes in children

‘s learning of syntax. Language and Learning (Special

issue of Harvard Educational Review), 34, 133

–151.

Brown, R., & Fraser, C. (1963). The acquisition of syntax. In

C. N. Cofer & B. Musgrave (Eds.), Verbal behavior and learning: Problems and processes (pp.
158

–201). New York: McGraw-Hill.

Brown, R., & Hanlon, C. (1970). Derivational complexity and order of acquisition. In J. R. Hayes (Ed.), Cognition and

the development of language (pp. 11

–53). New York: Wiley.

Brown, R. G. (1993). Schools of thought. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
Brown, S. W., Renzulli, J. S., Gubbins, E. J., Siegle, D., Zhang, W.,

& Chen, C.-H. (2005). Assumptions underlying the identi

ﬁcation of gifted and talented students. Gifted Child

Quarterly, 49(1), 68

–79.

Bruch, M., Juster, H., & Ka

ﬂowitz, N. (1983). Relationships of cognitive components of test anxiety to test

performance: Implications for assessment and treatment. Journal of Counseling Psychology, 30, 527

–536.

Bruel-Jungerman, E., Davis, S., Rampon, C., & Laroche, S. (2006).
Long

–term potentiation enhances neurogenesis in the adult dendrite gyrus. Journal of Neuroscience, 26(22),

5888

–5893. Bruer, J. T. (1997). Education and the brain: A bridge too far. Educational Researcher, 26, 4–16.

references

585

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in585 585

10/17/08 10:04:29 AM

REFERENCES

Bruer, J. T. (1999). The myth of the

ﬁrst three years: A new understanding of early brain development and lifelong

learning. New York: Free Press.

Bruer, J. T., & Greenough, W. T. (2001). The subtle science of how experience affects the brain. In D. B. Bailey Jr.,

J. T. Bruer,
F. J. Symons, & J. W. Lichtman (Eds.), Critical thinking about critical periods (pp. 209

–232). Baltimore: Brookes.

Bruner, J. (1961). The act of discovery. Harvard Educational Review, 31, 21

–32.

Bruner, J. S. (1965). The process of education. Cambridge, MA:

Harvard University Press.

Bruning, R. H., Schraw, G. J., Norby, M. M., & Ronning, R. R.

(2004). Cognitive psychology and instruction (4th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson.

Bruning, R. H., Schraw, G. J., Norby, M. M., & Ronning, R. R.

(2004). Cognitive psychology and instruction (4th ed.). Columbus, OH: Merrill.

Bruning, R. H., Schraw, G. J., & Ronning, R. R. (1995). Cognitive psychology and instruction (2nd Ed.). Englewood

Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Bryson, S. E. (1997). Epidemiology of autism: Overview and issues outstanding. In D. J. Cohen & F. R. Volkmar

(Eds.), Handbook of autism and pervasive developmental disorders (2nd ed., pp. 41

–46). New York: Wiley.

Büchel, C., & Sommer, M. (2004, February). Unsolved mystery:

What causes stuttering? PLoS Biology, 2(2), 0159

–0163.

Buehler, R., Grif

ﬁth, D., & Ross, M. (1994). Exploring the ―planning fallacy‖: Why people underestimate their task

completion times. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 67, 366

–381.

Bull, R., & Johnston, R. S. (1997). Children

‘s arithmetical difﬁculties: Contributions from processing speed, item

identi

ﬁcation, and short–term memory. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 65, 1–24.

Burden, P. (2003). Classroom management: Creating a successful learning community (2nd ed). New York: Wiley.
Burgess, A. F., & Gutstein, S. E. (2007). Quality of life for people with autism: Raising the standard for evaluating

successful outcomes. Child and Adolescent Mental Health, 12(2), 80

–86.

Burhans, K., & Dweck, C. (1995). Helplessness in early childhood: The role of contingent worth. Child Development,

66, 1719

–1738.

Burke, K. (2003). Research on the environmental elements:

Sound, light, temperature, and design. In R. Dunn & K. Griggs (Eds.), Synthesis of the Dunn and Dunn learning
style model research: Who, what, when, where, and so what? New York: St. John

‘s University.

Burke, K. (2006). From standards to rubrics in six steps. Thou-sand Oaks, CA: Corwin.

Burr, J. E., Ostrov, J. M., Jansen, E. A., Cullerton-Sen, C., & Crick,

N. R. (2005). Relational aggression and friendship during early childhood:

―I won‘t be your friend!‖ Early

Education and Development, 16(2), 161

–183.

Bussey, K., & Bandura, A. (1999). Social cognitive theory of gender development and differentiation. Psychological

Review, 106, 676

–713.

Butler, D. L. (1998). The strategic content learning approach to promoting self

–regulated learning: A report of three

studies. Journal of Educational Psychology, 90, 682

–697.

Butler, R. (1998). Determinants of help seeking: Relations between perceived reasons for classroom help-avoidance

and help seeking behaviors in an experimental context. Journal of Educational Psychology, 90, 630

–643.

Butler, R. (1999). Information seeking and achievement motivation in middle childhood and adolescence: The role of

conceptions of ability. Developmental Psychology, 35, 146

–163.

Butler, R. (2000). What learners want to know: The role of achievement goals in shaping information seeking,

learning, and interest. In C. Sansone & J. M. Harackiewicz (Eds.), Intrinsic and extrinsic motivation: The search for
optimal motivation and performance (pp. 161

–194). San Diego, CA: Academic Press.

Butler, S. M., & McMunn, N. D. (2006). A teacher

’s guide to classroom assessment. Thousand Oaks, CA: Corwin.

Butterworth, G. (2001). Joint visual attention in infancy. In

A. Fogel (Ed.), Blackwell handbook of infant development. Ox-ford, UK: Blackwell.

Bybee, R. W. (2002). Learning science and the science of learning. Arlington, VA: NSTA Press.

Byrne, B. M., & Shavelson, R. J. (1986). On the structure of adolescent self-concept. Journal of Educational

Psychology, 78, 474

–481.

Byrnes, J. P. (2001). Cognitive development and learning in instructional contexts. Boston: Allyn & Bacon.
Byrnes, J. P. (2001). Minds, brains, and learning: understanding the psychological and educational relevance of

neuroscienti

ﬁc research. New York: Guilford Press.

Byrnes, J. P., & Fox, N. A. (1998). The educational relevance of research in cognitive neuroscience. Educational

Psychology Review, 10, 297

–342.

Caine, G., & Caine, R. N. (1997). Education on the edge of possibility. Alexandria, VA: Association for Supervision

and Curriculum Development.

Cairnes, R. (1986). A contemporary perspective on social development. In P. S. Strain, M. J. Gurlanick, & H. M.

Walker (Eds.), Children

’s social behavior: Development, assessment and modiﬁcation. Orlando, FL: Academic

Press.

Calfee, R., & Brown, R. (1979). Grouping students for instruction.

In S. L. Duke (Ed.), Classroom management: Seventy

–eighth yearbook of the National Society for the Study of

Education, Part 2 (pp. 144

–182). Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Cameron, J. (2001). Negative effects of reward on intrinsic motivation

—a limited phenomenon: Comment on Deci,

Koestner, and Ryan (2001). Review of Educational Research, 71(1), 29

–42.

Campbell, A., & Namy, L. (2003). The role of social referential context and verbal and nonverbal symbol learning.

Child Development, 74, 549

–563.

Campbell, L. (1997). How teachers interpret MI theory. Educational Leadership, 55(1), 14

–19.

586

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in586 586

10/17/08 10:04:31 AM

REFERENCES

Campbell, S. B., Endman, M. W., & Bern

ﬁeld, G. (1977). A three year follow-up of hyper-active preschoolers into

elementary school. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 18, 239

–249.

Campbell, S. B., Ewing, L. J., Breaux, A. M., & Szumowski, E. K.

(1986). Parent-referred problem three-year-olds: Follow-up at school entry. Journal of Child Psychology and
Psychiatry, 27, 473

–488.

Campione, J. C., & Brown, A. L. (1990). Guided learning and transfer: Implications for approaches to assessment.

In
N. Frederiksen, R. Glaser, A. Lesgold, & M. Shafto (Eds.), Diagnostic monitoring of skill and
knowledge acquisition (pp. 141

–172). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Campione, J. C., Brown, A. L., & Ferrara, R. A. (1982). Experimental and clinical interventions of retarded

individuals: Intelligence, learning, and transfer. In R. Sternberg (Ed.), Handbook of human intelligence (pp.
392

–473). New York: Cambridge University Press.

Campos, J. J., & Sternberg, C. (1981). Perception, appraisal, and emotion: The onset of social referencing. In M. E.

Lamb and
L. R. Sherrod (Eds.), Infant social cognition: Empirical and theoretical considerations. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Campoy, R. (2005). Case study analysis in the classroom: Becoming a re

ﬂective practitioner. Thousand Oaks, CA:

Sage.

Cannon, W. B. (1929). Bodily changes in pain, hunger, fear, and rage. New York: Branford.
Canter, L., & Canter, M. (1992). Assertive discipline: Positive behavior management for today

’s classroom (2nd ed.).

Santa Monica, CA: Canter & Associates.

Canter, L., & Canter, M. (1998). First-class teacher: Success strategies for new teachers. Santa Monica, CA: Canter

& Associates.

Cardelle-Elawar, M., & Wetzel, K. (1995). Students and computers as partners in developing problem solving skills.

Journal of Research on Computing in Education, 27(4), 378

–401. Washington, DC: National Association for the

Education of Young Children.

Carlo, M. S., & Royer, J. M. (1999). Cross-language transfer of reading skills. In D. A. Wagner, R. L. Venezky, & B.

V. Street (Eds.), Literacy: An international handbook (pp. 148

–154). Boulder, CO: Westview Press.

Carlson, S. M., & Moses, L. J. (2001). Individual differences in inhibitory control and children

‘s theory of mind. Child

Development, 72, 1032

–1053.

Carpendale, J. I. M. (2000). Kohlberg and Piaget on stages and moral reasoning. Developmental Review, 20,

181

–205.

Carr, M., & Biddlecomb, B. (1998). Metacognition in mathematics from a constructivist perspective. In D. J. Hacker,

J. Dunlosky, & A. C. Graesser (Eds.), Metacognition in educational theory and practice (pp. 69

–91). Mahwah, NJ:

Erlbaum.

Carroll, J. B. (1971). Problems of measurement related to the concept of learning for mastery. In J. H. Block (Ed.),

Mastery learning: Theory and practice (pp. 29

–46). New York: Holt, Rinehart, & Winston.

Carroll, J. B. (1992). Cognitive abilities: The state of the art. Psychological Science, 3(5), 266

–270.

Carroll, J. B. (1993). Human cognitive abilities: A survey of factor-analytic studies. New York: Cambridge University

Press.

Carter, K. (1985). Teacher comprehension of classroom processes:

An emerging direction in classroom management research. Paper presented at the annual meeting of the
American Educational Research Association, Chicago.

Carter, K., Cushing, K., Sabers, D., Stein, P., & Berliner, D. (1988).

Expert-novice differences in perceiving and processing visual classroom information. Journal of Teacher
Education, 39(3), 25

–31.

Cartledge, G., Kea, C., & Simmons-Reed, E. (2002). Serving culturally diverse children with serious emotional

disturbance and their families. Journal of Child and Family Studies, 11(1), 113

–126.

Case, R. (1985). Intellectual development: Birth to adulthood.

Orlando, FL: Academic Press.

Caselli, M. C., Bates, E. Casadio, P., Fenson, J., Fenson, L., Sanderl, L., & Weir, J. (1995). A cross-linguistic

study of early lexical development. Cognitive Development, 10, 159

–199.

Caspi, A. (2000). The child is father to the man: Personality continuities from childhood to adulthood. Journal of

Personality and Social Psychology, 78, 158

–172.

Caspi, A., Taylor, A., Mo

ﬁtt, T. E., & Plomin, R. (2000). Neighborhood deprivation affects children‘s mental health:

Environmental risks identi

ﬁed in a genetic design. Psychological Science, 11, 338–342.

Cassidy, J. (1999). The nature of the child

‘s ties. In J. Cassidy &

P. R. Shaver (Eds.), Handbook of Attachment (pp. 3

–20). New York: Guilford Press.

Cassady, J. C., & Johnson, R. E. (2002). Cognitive test anxiety and academic performance. Contemporary

Educational Psychology, 27, 270

–295.

Catrambone, R., & Holyoak, K. J. (1989). Overcoming contextual limitations on problem-solving transfer. Journal of

Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory, and Cognition, 15, 1147

–1156.

Catsambis, S., Mulkey, L., & Crain, R. L. (1999). To track or not to track? The social effects of gender and middle

school tracking. Research in Sociology of Education and Socialization, 12, 135

–163.

Catsambis, S., Mulkey, L., & Crain, R. L. (2001). For better or for worse? A nationwide study of the social

psychological effects of gender and ability grouping in mathematics. Social Psychology of Education, 5, 83

–115.

Cattell, R. B. (1963). Theory of

ﬂuid and crystallized intelligence:

A critical experiment. Journal of Educational Psychology, 54, 1

–22.

Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (2007). Retrieved

September 24, 2007, from http://www.cdc.gov/ncbddd/fas/ fasask.htm.

Chacko, A., Pelham, W. E., Jr., Gnagy, E. M., Greiner, A., Vallano,

G., Bukstein, O., et al. (2005). Stimulant medication effects in a summer treatment program among young children

with attention-de

ﬁcit/hyperactivity disorder. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry,

44, 249

–257.

Chafetz, M. D. (1990). Nutrition and neurotransmitters: The nutrient bases of behavior. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:

Prentice Hall.

Champagne, A. B., Gunstone, R. F., & Klopfer, L. E. (1985). Effecting changes in cognitive structures among

physics students.

references

587

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in587 587

10/17/08 10:04:33 AM

REFERENCES

In H. T. West & A. L. Pines (Eds.), Cognitive structure and conceptual change (pp. 163

–187). Orlando, FL:

Academic Press.

Chandler, M. A., & Chapman, M. (Eds.). (1991). Criteria for competence. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Charles, C. M. (1999). Building classroom discipline (6th ed.).

New York: Longman.

Charney, R. S. (2002). Teaching children to care: Classroom management for ethical and academic growth, K

–8.

(Rev. ed.). Northeast Foundation for Children.

Chatterji, M. (2003). Designing and using tools for educational assessment. Boston: Pearson.
Chen, C., & Stevenson, H. W. (1995). Motivation and mathematics achievement: A comparative study of

Asian-American, Caucasian-American, and East Asian high school students. Child Development, 66, 1215

–1234.

Chen, X., Rubin, K. H., & Bo-shu, L. (1995). Depressed mood in Chinese children: Relations with school

performance and family environment. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 63, 938

–947.

Chen, Z., & Klahr, D. (1999). All other things being equal: Acquisition and transfer of the control of variables strategy.

Child Development, 70(5), 1098

–1120.

Cherry-Wilkinson, L., & Dollaghan, C. (1979). Peer communication in

ﬁrst grade reading groups. Theory Into

Practice, 18, 267

–274.

Cheung, S. (1995). Life events, classroom environment, achievement expectation, and depression among early

adolescents. Social Behavior and Personality, 23, 83

–92.

Cheyne, J. A., & Walters, R. H. (1970). Punishment and prohibition: Some origins of self-control. New Directions in

Psychology, 4, 281

–366.

Chi, M. T. H. (1978). Knowledge structure and memory development. In R. Siegler (Ed.), Children

’s thinking: What

develops? Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Chi, M. T. H. (1987). Representing knowledge and metaknowl-edge: Implications for interpreting metamemory

research. In
F. E. Weinert & R. H. Kluwe (Eds.), Metacognition, motivation, and understanding (pp. 239

–266). Hillsdale, NJ:

Erlbaum.

Chi, M. T. H., Bassock, M., Lewis, M. W., Reimann, P., & Glaser,

R. (1989). Self explanations: How students study and use examples in learning to solve problems. Cognitive
Science, 13, 145

–182.

Chi, M. T. H., Glaser, R., & Farr, M. (Eds.). (1988). The nature of expertise. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Child Welfare

Information Gateway (2005). State Statutes Series 2005. Mandatory reporters of child abuse and neglect:

Summary of state laws.

Chinn, C. A., & Brewer, W. F. (1998). An empirical test of a taxonomy of responses to anomalous data in science.

Journal of Research in Science Teaching, 35, 623

–654.

Chorzempa, B. F., & Graham, S. (2006). Primary-grade teachers

‘ use of within-class ability grouping in reading.

Journal of Educational Psychology, 98(3), 529

–541.

Chunn, E. W. (1989). Sorting black students for success and failure: The inequity of ability grouping and tracking. In

W.
D. Smith & E. W. Chunn (Eds.), Black education: A quest for
equality and excellence (pp. 93

–106). New Brunswick, NJ: Transaction.

Church, M. A., Elliot, A. J., & Gable, S. L. (2001). Perceptions of classroom environment, achievement goals,

and achievement outcomes. Journal of Educational Psychology, 93(1), 43

–54.

Cillessen, A. H. N., & Rose, A. J. (2005). Understanding popularity in the peer system. Current Directions in

Psychological Science, 14(2), 102

–105.

Cisero, C. A., & Royer, J. M. (1995). The development and cross-language transfer of phonological awareness.

Contemporary Educational Psychology, 20, 275

–303.

Cisero, C. A., Royer, J. M., Marchant, H. G., & Jackson, S. J.

(1997). Can the Computer-based Academic Assessment System (CAAS) be used to diagnose reading disability in
college students? Journal of Educational Psychology, 89(4), 599

–620.

Cizek, G. J. (2003). Detecting and preventing classroom cheating: Promoting integrity in assessment. Thousand

Oaks, CA: Corwin.

Clark, B. (1990). An update on ability grouping and its importance for gifted learners. Communicator, 20(5), 1, 20

–21.

Clark, C., & Yinger, R. (1979). Research on teacher planning, a progress report. Journal of Curriculum Studies,

11(11), 175

–177.

Clements, D. H., & Nastasi, B. K. (1993). Electronic media and early childhood education. In B. Spodek (Ed.),

Handbook of research on the education of young children (pp. 251

–275). New York: Macmillan.

Clements, D. H., & Sarama, J. (2003). Young children and technology: What does the research say? Young

Children, 58(6), 34

–40.

Clifford, M. M. (1990). Students need challenge, not easy success. Educational Leadership, 48(1), 22

–26.

Clifford, M. M. (1991). Risk taking: Empirical and educational considerations. Educational Psychologist, 26,

263

–298.

Cobb, P., & Bowers, J. (1999). Cognitive and situated learning:

Perspective in theory and practice. Educational Researcher, 28(2), 4

–15.

Cohen, D., & Strayer, J. (1996). Empathy in conduct-disordered and comparison youth. Developmental

Psychology, 32, 988

–998.

Cohen, R. J., & Swerdlik, M. E. (2005). Psychological testing and assessment: An introduction to tests

and measurement (6th ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill.

Cohn, D., Patterson, C., & Christopoulos, C. (1991). The family and children

‘s peer relationships. Journal of Social

and Personal Relationships, 8, 315

–346.

Coie, J. D., & Dodge, K. A. (1998). Aggression and antisocial behavior. In N. Eisenberg (Ed.), Manual of

child psychology: Vol. 3. Social, emotional, and personality development (pp. 779

–862). New York: Wiley.

Cokley, K. (2000). An investigation of academic self-concept and its relationship to academic achievement in

African American college students. Journal of Black Psychology, 26(2), 148

–164.

Colangelo, N., & Davis, G. A. (Eds.). (2003). Handbook of gifted education (3rd ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

588

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in588 588

10/17/08 10:04:35 AM

REFERENCES

Colby, A., & Kohlberg, L. (1987). The measurement of moral judgment: Vol. 1. Theoretical foundations

and research validation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Colby, A., Kohlberg, L., Gibbs, J., & Lieberman, M. (1983). A longitudinal study of moral judgment. Monographs of

the Society for Research in Child Development, 48 (Nos. 1/2, Serial No. 200).

Coleman, M., & Gillberg, C. (1996). The schizophrenias: A biological approach to the schizophrenia

spectrum disorders. New York: Springer.

Coles, G. (2004). Danger in the classroom:

―Brain glitch‖ research and learning to read. Phi Delta Kappan, 85(5),

344

–357.

Coles, R. (1998). The moral intelligence of children: How to raise a moral child. New York: Plume. Collaborative for

Academic, Social, and Emotional Learning (2003). Safe and sound: An educator

’s guide to evidence-based social

and emotional learning programs. Chicago: University of Illinois at Chicago.

Collier, V. P., & Thomas, W. P. (2004). The astounding effectiveness of dual language education for all. NABE

Journal of Research and Practice, 2(1), 1

–20.

Collins, A., Brown, J. S., & Newman, S. E. (1989). Cognitive apprenticeship: Teaching the crafts of reading,

writing, and mathematics. In L. B. Resnick (Ed.), Knowing, learning, and instruction: Essays in honor of Robert
Glaser (pp. 453

–494). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Collins, A., Hawkins, J., & Carver, S. M. (1991). A cognitive apprenticeship for disadvantaged students. In B.

Means,
C. Chelemer, & M. S. Knapp (Eds.), Teaching advanced skills to at-risk students. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.

Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Noe, R. A. (2000). Toward an integrative theory of training motivation: A

meta-analytic path analysis of 20 years of research. Journal of Applied Psychology, 85, 678

–707.

Compton, D. L., & Carlisle, J. F. (1994). Speed of word recognition as a distinguishing characteristic of reading

disabilities. Educational Psychology Review, 6(2), 115

–140.

Conners, C. K., Epstein, J. N., March, J. S., Angold, A., Wells,

K. C., Klaric, J., Swanson, J. M., Arnold., L. E., Abikoff, H. B., Elliott, G. R., Greenhill, L. L., Hechtman, I.,
Hinshaw, S. P., Hoza, B., Jensen, P. S., Kraemer, H. C., Newcorn, J. H., Pelham,
W. E., Severe, J. B., Vitiello, B., & Wigal, T. (2001). Multimodal treatment of ADHD in the MTA: An alternative
outcome analysis. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 40, 159

–167.

Connor, D. F. (2002). Aggression and antisocial behavior in children and adolescents: Research and

treatment. New York: Guilford.

Cook, R., Tessier, A., & Armbruster, V. (1987). Adapting early childhood curricula for children with special needs

(2nd ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Merrill/Prentice Hall.

Cooper, R. (1999). Urban school reform: Student responses to detracking in a racially mixed high school. Journal of

Education for Students Placed at Risk, 4(3), 259

–275.

Cooper, R. P., & Aslin, R. N. (1990). Preference for infant-directed speech in the

ﬁrst month after

birth. Child Development, 61, 1584

–1595.

Copeland, W. D. (1983). Classroom management and student teachers

’ cognitive abilities: A relationship. Paper

presented at the annual convention of the American Educational Research Association, Montreal.

Cordova, D. I., & Lepper, M. R. (1996). Intrinsic motivation and the process of learning: Bene

ﬁcial effects of

contextualization, personalization and choice. Journal of Educational Psychology, 88, 715

–730.

Corkill, A. J. (1992). Advance organizers: Facilitators of recall.

Educational Psychology Review, 4, 33

–67.

Corno, L. (1996). Homework is a complicated thing. Educational

Researcher, 25, 27

–30.

Costa, A. L. (1989). Reassessing assessment. Educational Leadership, 20(1), 2.
Costa, A. L. (1996). Prologue. In D. Hyerle (Ed.), Visual tools for constructing knowledge. Alexandria, VA:

Association for Supervision and Curriculum Development.

Costa, A. L., & Kallick, B. (2000). Assessing and reporting on habits of mind. Alexandria, VA: Association for

Supervision and Curriculum Development.

Cotton, K. (1990). Close-up no. 9: Schoolwide and classroom discipline. Portland, OR: Northwest

Regional Educational Laboratory.

Covington, M. (1992). Making the grade: A self-worth perspective on motivation and school reform. Cambridge:

Cambridge University Press.

Covington, M. (1998). The will to learn: A guide for motivating young people. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Covington, M., & Beery, R. (1976). Self-worth and school learning. New York: Holt, Rinehart, & Winston.
Covington, M., & Omelich, C. L. (1984a). An empirical examination of Weiner

‘s critique of attribution research.

Journal of Educational Psychology, 76, 1214

–1225.

Covington, M. V. (1984). The motive for self worth. In R. Ames

& C. Ames (Eds.), Research on motivation in education: Student motivation (Vol. 1, pp. 77

–113). San Diego, CA:

Academic Press.

Covington, M. V. (1986). Anatomy of failure-induced anxiety:

The role of cognitive mediators. In R. Schwarzer (Ed.), Self-related cognitions in anxiety and motivation (pp.
247

–263). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Covington, M. V. (2000). Intrinsic versus extrinsic motivation in schools: A reconciliation. Current Directions in

Psychological Science, 9, 22

–25.

Covington, M. V., & Müeller, K. J. (2001). Intrinsic versus extrinsic motivation: An approach/avoidance

reformulation. Education Psychology Review, 13, 157

–176.

Covington, M. V., & Omelich, C. L. (1979). Effort: The double-edged sword in school achievement. Journal of

Educational Psychology, 71, 169

–182.

Covington, M. V., & Omelich, C. L. (1984b). Task-oriented versus competitive learning structures: Motivational and

performance consequences. Journal of Educational Psychology, 76, 1038

–1050.

references

589

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in589 589

10/17/08 10:04:37 AM

REFERENCES

Covington, M. V., & Omelich, C. L. (1985). Ability and effort valuation among failure-avoiding and failure-accepting

students. Journal of Educational Psychology, 77, 446

–459.

Cowan, N. (1988). Evolving conceptions of memory storage, selective attention, and their mutual constraints within

the human information processing system. Psychological Bulletin, 104, 163

–191.

Crago, M. (1992). Communicative interaction and second language acquisition: The Inuit example. TESOL Quarterly,

26, 487

–505.

Craske, M. L. (1985). Improving persistence through observational learning and attribution retraining. British Journal

of Educational Psychology, 55, 138

–147.

Crawford, J. (1997). Bilingual education: History, politics, theory, and practice (4th ed.). Los Angeles: Bilingual

Education Services.

Creel, C., & Karnes, F. A. (1988). Parental expectations and young gifted children. Roeper Review, 11,

–50.

Crick, N. R., & Dodge, K. A. (1994). A review and reformulation of social information-processing mechanisms

in children

‘s social adjustment. Psychological Bulletin, 115, 74–101.

Crick, N. R., & Dodge, K. A. (1996). Social information-processing mechanisms in reactive and proactive

aggression. Child Development, 67, 993

–1002.

Crick, N. R., & Grotpeter, J. K. (1995). Relational aggression, gender and social-psychological adjustment. Child

Development, 66, 710

–722.

Crosnoe, R. (2002). High school curriculum track and adolescent association with delinquent friends. Journal of

Adolescent Research, 17(2), 143

–167.

Crouter, A. C., Bumpus, M. F., Maguire, M. C., & McHale, S. M.

(1999). Linking parents

‘ work pressure and adolescent‘s well-being: Insights into dynamics in dual-earner families.

Developmental Psychology, 35(6), 1453

–1461.

Crouter, A. C., & McHale, S. (2005). The long arm of the job revisited: Parenting in dual-earner families. In

T. Luster &
L. Okagaki (Eds.), Parenting: An ecological perspective. Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Csikszentmihalyi, M. (1990). Flow: The psychology of optimal experience. New York: HarperCollins.
Csikszentmihalyi, M. (1990). The domain of creativity. In M. A.

Runco & R. S. Albert (Eds.), Theories of creativity (pp. 190

–212). Newbury Park, CA: Sage.

Csikszentmihalyi, M. (1996). Creativity. New York: HarperCollins.
Csikszentmihalyi, M. (1997). Intrinsic motivation and effective teaching: A

ﬂow analysis. In J. J. Bass (Ed.),

Teaching well and liking it: Motivating faculty to teach effectively (pp. 72

–89). Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University

Press.

Csikszentmihalyi, M. (2000). Beyond boredom and anxiety:

Experiencing

ﬂow in work and play (2nd ed.). San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.

Cullinan, D. (2007). Students with emotional and behavioral disorders: An introduction for teachers and other

helping professionals (2nd ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Merrill Prentice Hall.

Curwin, R. (1992). Rediscovering hope: Our greatest teaching strategy. Bloomington, IN: National Education

Service.

Curwin, R. L., & Mendler, A. N. (1999). Discipline with dignity.

Alexandria, VA: Association for Supervision and Curriculum Development.

Cuttance, P., & Stokes, S. (2001). Reporting on student and school achievement. Sydney, Australia:

University of Sydney.

Damasio, A. R. (1994). Descartes

’ error: Emotion, reason, and the human brain. New York: Avon Books.

Damasio, A. R. (1999). The feeling of what happens. New York:

Harcourt Brace.

Damon, W. (1984). Peer education: The untapped potential.

Journal of Applied Developmental Psychology, 5, 331

–343.

Damon, W. (1988). The moral child: Nurturing children

’s natural moral growth. New York: Free Press.

Dansereau, D. F. (1988). Cooperative learning strategies. In C. E.

Weinstein, E. T. Goetz, & P. A. Alexander (Eds.), Learning and study strategies: Issues in assessment, instruction,
and evaluation (pp. 103

–120). Orlando, FL: Academic Press.

Darling-Hammond, L. (1995). Inequality and access to knowledge. In J. A. Banks & C. A. M. Banks (Eds.),

Handbook of research on multicultural education (pp. 465

–483). New York: Macmillan.

Das, J. P. (1995). Some thoughts on two aspects of Vygotsky

‘s work. Educational Psychologist, 30(2), 93–97.

Das, J. P., Naglieri, J. A., & Kirby, J. R. (1994). Assessment of cognitive processes. Needham Heights, MA: Allyn &

Bacon.

Dasen, P. R. (1977). Introduction. In P. R. Dasen (Ed.), Piagetian psychology: Cross-cultural contributions. New

York: Gardner.

DaSilva Iddlings, A. C. (2005). Linguistic access and participation: English language learners in an

English-dominant community of practice. Bilingual Research Journal, 29(1), 165

–183.

Davelaar, E. J., Goshen-Gottstein, Y., Ashkenazi, A., Haarmann,

H. J., & Usher, M. (2005). The demise of short-term memory revisited: Empirical and computational investigations
of recency effects. Psychological Review, 112, 3

–42.

Davidson, J., & Davidson, B. (2004). Genius denied: How to stop wasting our brightest young minds.

New York: Simon & Schuster.

Davidson, J. E., & Sternberg, R. J. (1998). Smart problem solving: How metacognition helps. In D. J. Hacker, J.

Dunlosky, & A. C. Graesser (Eds.), Metacognition in educational theory and practice (pp. 47

–68). Mahwah, NJ:

Erlbaum.

Davies, P. T., & Windle, M. (2001). Interparental discord and adolescent adjustment trajectories: The potentiating

and protective role of interpersonal attributes. Child Development, 72(4), 1163

–1178.

Davis, B. C., & Shade, D. D. (1994). Integrate, don

’t isolate! Computers in the early childhood curriculum [ERIC

digest]. Urbana, IL: ERIC Clearinghouse on Elementary and Early Childhood.

Davis, G. A. (2003). Identifying creative students, teaching for creative growth. In N. Colangelo & G. A. Davis (Eds.),

Handbook of gifted education (3rd ed., pp. 311

–324). Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

590

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in590 590

10/17/08 10:04:39 AM

REFERENCES

Davis, G. A., & Thomas, M. A. (1989). Effective schools and effective teachers. Boston: Allyn & Bacon.
Davydov, V. V. (1972). The types of genralization in learning.

Moscow: Pedagogika.

Davydov, V. V. (1988). The concept of theoretical generalization. Studies in Soviet Thought, 36, 169

–202.

Day, J. D., & Cordon, L. A. (1993). Static and dynamic measures of ability: An experimental comparison.

Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 75

–82.

DeAngelis, T. (2004). What

‘s to blame for the surge in super-sized Americans? Monitor on Psychology, 35(1),

–49.

Debacker, T. K., & Nelson, R. M. (2000). Motivation to learn science: Differences related to gender, class type, and

ability. Journal of Educational Research, 93, 245

–254.

de Boysson-Bardies, B. (1999). How language comes to children:

From birth to two years. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

de Bruyn, E. H., & Cillessen, A. H. N. (2006). Popularity in early adolescence: Prosocial and antisocial

subtypes. Journal of Adolescent Research, 21(6), 607

–627.

deCharms, R. (1968). Personal causation: The internal affective determinants of behavior. New York: Academic

Press.

deCharms, R. (1976). Enhancing motivation. New York: Irving-ton.

Deci, E. L. (1971). Effects of externally mediated rewards on intrinsic motivation. Journal of Personality and Social

Psychology, 18, 105

–115.

Deci, E. L., & Cascio, W. F. (1972, April). Changes in intrinsic motivation as a function of negative feedback and

threats. Paper presented at the meeting of the Eastern Psychological Association, Boston.

Deci, E. L., Eghrari, H., Patrick, B. C., & Leone, D. R. (1994). Facilitating internalization: The self-determination

theory perspective. Journal of Personality, 62, 119

–142.

Deci, E. L., Koestner, R., & Ryan, R. M. (1999a). A meta-analytic review of experiments examining the effects of

extrinsic rewards on intrinsic motivation. Psychological Bulletin, 125(6), 627

–668.

Deci, E. L., Koestner, R., & Ryan, R. M. (1999b). The undermining effect is a reality after all

—extrinsic rewards,

task interest, and self-determination: Reply to Eisenberger, Pierce, and Cameron (1999) and Lepper, Henderlong,
and Gingras (1999). Psychological Bulletin, 125(6), 692

–700.

Deci, E. L., Koestner, R., & Ryan. R. M. (2001). Extrinsic rewards and intrinsic motivation in education:

Reconsidered once again. Review of Educational Research, 71(1), 1

–27.

Deci, E. L., & Ryan, R. M. (1985). Intrinsic motivation and self-determination in human behavior. New York: Plenum

Press.

Deci, E. L., & Ryan, R. M. (1992). The initiation and regulation of intrinsically motivated learning and achievement. In

A. K. Boggiano & T. S. Pittman (Eds.), Achievement and motivation: A social-developmental perspective (pp.
9

–36). New York: Cambridge University Press.

Deci, E. L., & Ryan, R. M. (2000). The

―what‖ and the ―why‖ of goal pursuits: Human needs and the

self

–determination of behavior. Psychological Inquiry, 11, 227–268.

Deci, E. L., Ryan, R. M., & Koestner, R. (2001). The pervasive negative effects of rewards on intrinsic motivation:

Response to Cameron (2001). Review of Educational Research, 71(1), 43

–51.

Deci, E. L., Schwartz, A. J., Sheinman, L., & Ryan, R. M. (1981).

An instrument to assess adults

‘ orientations toward control versus autonomy with children: Reﬂections on intrinsic

motivation and perceived competence. Journal of Educational Psychology, 73, 642

–650.

Deci, E. L., Vallerand, R. J., Pelletier, L. G., & Ryan, R. M. (1991).

Motivation and education: The self-determination perspective. Educational Psychologist, 26, 325

–346.

Dehaene, S., Spelke, E., Pinel, P., Stanescu, R., & Tsivkin, S.

(1999). Sources of mathematical thinking: Behavioral and brain-imaging evidence. Science, 284, 970

–974.

DeLoache, J. S., Cassidy, D. J., & Brown, A. L. (1985). Precursors of mnemonic strategies in very young children

‘s

memory for the location of hidden objects. Child Development, 56, 125

–137.

Delpit, L. (1995). Other people

’s children: Cultural conﬂict in the classroom. New York: New Press.

Demo, D. H., & Acock, A. C. (1996). Family structure, family process, and adolescent well-being. Journal of Research

on Adolescence, 6, 457

–488.

Dempster, F. N. (1991). Synthesis of research on reviews and tests. Educational Leadership, 48(7), 71

–76.

Dempster, F. N. (1993). Resistance to interference: Developmental changes in a basic processing mechanism. In M.

L. Howe &
R. Pasnak (Eds.), Emerging themes in cognitive development. Vol 1: Foundations. New York: Springer-Verlag.

Dendato, K., & Diener, D. (1986). Effectiveness of cognitive/ relaxation therapy and study-skills training in reduced

self-reported anxiety and improving the academic performance of test-anxious students. Journal of Counseling
Psychology, 33, 131

–135.

Denham, C., & Lieberman, A. (1980). Time to learn. Washington, DC: National Institute of Education.
Denham, S. A. (1986). Social cognition, prosocial behavior, and emotion in preschoolers: Contextual validation. Child

Development, 57, 194

–201.

Denham, S. A. (1998). Emotional development in young children.

New York: Guilford Press.

Denham, S. A., Blair, K. A., DeMulder, E., Levitas, J., Sawyer, K.,

Auerbach-Major, S., & Queenan, P. (2003). Preschool emotional competence: Pathway to social competence?
Child Development, 74(1), 238

–256.

Dennen, V. P. (2004). Cognitive apprenticeship in educational practice: Research on scaffolding, modeling,

mentoring, and coaching as instructional strategies. In D. H. Jonassen (Ed.), Handbook of research on educational
communications and technology (pp. 813

–828). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Denning, R., & Smith, P. (1997). Cooperative learning and technology. Journal of Computer and Mathematics and

Science, 16(2

–3), 177–200.

DeTemple, J. (2001). Parents and children reading books together. In D. Dickinson & P. Tabors (Eds.),

Beginning literacy with language: Young children learning at home and school (pp. 31

–51). Baltimore: Paul H.

Brookes.

references

591

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in591 591

10/17/08 10:04:41 AM

REFERENCES

DeVoe, J. F., Peter, K., Kaufman, P., Ruddy, S. A., Miller, A. K.,

Planty, M., Snyder, T. D., & Rand, M. R. (2003, October). Indicators of school crime and safety: 2003
NCES2004

–004/NCJ 201257. U.S. Departments of Education and Justice, Washington, DC. Retrieved December

3, 2003 from www.ojp.usdoj. gov/bjs/.

DeVries, D., & Edwards, K. (1974). Student teams and learning games: Their effects on cross-race and cross-sex

interaction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 66(5), 741

–749.

DeVries, R. (1969). Constancy of generic identity in the years three to six. Monographs of the Society for Research in

Child Development, 34 (Serial 127).

Dewey, J. (1933). How we think: A restatement of the relation of re

ﬂective thinking to the educational process.

Lexington, MA: Heath.

Dhopeshwarkar, G. A. (1983). Nutrition and brain development.

New York: Plenum Press.

Diener, C. I., & Dweck, C. S. (1978). An analysis of learned helplessness: Continuous changes in performance,

strategy, and achievement cognitions after failure. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 36, 451

–462.

Dion, K. K., & Dion, K. L. (2004). Gender, immigrant generation, and ethnocultural identity. Sex Roles, 50(5/6),

347

–355.

Dominowski, R. L. (1998). Verbalization and problem solving. In

D. J. Hacker, J. Dunlosky, & A. C. Graesser (Eds.), Metacognition in educational theory and practice (pp. 25

–45).

Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Dornbusch, S. M., Carlsmith, J. M., Bushwall, S. J., Ritter, P. L.,

Leiderman, H., Hastorf, A. H., & Gross, R. T. (1985). Single parents, extended households, and the control of
adolescents. Child Development, 56, 326

–341.

Doty, G. (2001). Fostering emotional intelligence in K

–8 students.

Thousand Oaks, CA: Corwin Press.

Douglas, V. I. (2005). Cognitive de

ﬁcits in children with attention deﬁcit hyperactivity disorder: A long-term follow-up.

Canadian Psychology, 46, 23

–31.

Dowson, M., & McInerney, D. M. (2001). Psychological parameters of students

‘ social and work avoidance goals: A

qualitative investigation. Journal of Educational Psychology, 93, 35

–42.

Doyle, A., & Aboud, F. (1995) A longitudinal study of White children

‘s racial prejudice as a social cognitive

development. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 41, 213

–223.

Doyle, W. (1986). Classroom organization and management.

In M. C. Wittrock (Ed.), Handbook of research on teaching (pp. 392

–431). New York: Macmillan.

Drayer, A. M. (1979). Problems in middle school and high school teaching: A handbook for student teachers

and beginning teachers (pp. 182

–187). Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

Dreikurs, R. (1968). Psychology in the classroom. (2nd ed.) New

York: Harper & Row.

Dreikurs, R., Grunwald, B. B., & Pepper, F. C. (1982). Maintaining sanity in the classroom: Classroom

management techniques (2nd ed. ), New York: Harper & Row.

Driscoll, M. P. (2005). Psychology of learning for instruction.

Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

Dubois, D. L., Felner, R. D., Brand, S., Adan, A. M., & Evans,

E. G. (1992). A prospective study of life stress, social support, and adaptation in early adolescence. Child
Development, 63, 542

–557.

Duncan, G. J., & Brooks-Gunn, J. (2000). Family poverty, welfare reform, and child development. Child

Development, 71, 188

–196.

Duncker, K. (1945). On problem solving (L. S. Lees, Trans.). Psychological Monographs, 58(5, Whole No. 270).
Dunlosky, J., & Hertzog, C. (1998). Training programs to improve learning later in adulthood: Helping older adults

educate themselves. In D. J. Hacker, J. Dunlosky, & A. C. Graesser (Eds.), Metacognition in educational theory
and practice (pp. 249

–275). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Dunn, J. (2006). Moral development in early childhood and social interaction in the family. In M. Killen & J. Smetana

(Eds.), Handbook of moral development. Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum. Dunn, J., Brown, J., & Beardsall, L. (1991). Family
talk about feeling states and children

‘s later understanding of others‘ emotions. Developmental Psychology, 27,

448

–455.

Dunn, R., & Griggs, S. A. (Eds.). (2003). Synthesis of the Dunn and Dunn learning style model research: Who, what

when, where, and so what? New York: St. John

‘s University.

DuPaul, G. J., & Eckert, T. L. (1997). The effects of school-based interventions for children with attention de

ﬁcit

hyperactivity disorder: A meta-analysis. School Psychology Review, 26, 5

–27. Durik, A. M., Vida, M., & Eccles, J. S.

(2006). Task values and ability beliefs as predictors of high school literacy choices: A developmental analysis.
Journal of Educational Psychology, 98(2), 382

–393.

Durlack, J. A., & Weissberg, R. P. (2005). A major meta-analysis of positive youth development programs.

Presentation at the annual meeting of the American Psychological Association. Washington, DC.

Durnin, J. H., Perrone, A. E., & MacKay, L. (1997). Teaching problem solving in elementary school mathematics.

Journal of Structural Learning and Intelligent Systems, 13, 53

–69. Durston, S., Pol, H. E. H., Schnack, H. G.,

Buitelaar, J. K., Steen-huis, M. P., Minderaa, R. B., Kahn, R. S., & van Engeland, H. (2004). Magnetic resonance
imaging of boys with attention-de

ﬁcit/hyperactivity disorder and their unaffected siblings. Journal of the American

Academy of Adolescent Psychiatry, 43(3), 332

–340.

Dusek, J. B., & McIntyre, J. G. (2006). Self-concept and self-esteem development. In G. R. Adams & M. D. Berzonsky

(Eds.), Blackwell handbook of adolescence. Malden, MA: Blackwell. Dutton, J., Dutton, M., & Perry, J. (2002). How
do on-line students differ from lecture students? Journal of Asynchronous Learning Networks Online, 6(1).
Dweck, C. (1975). The role of expectations and attributions in the alleviation of learned helplessness. Journal of

Personality and Social Psychology, 31, 674

–685.

Dweck, C. (1985). Motivation. In R. Glaser & A. Lesgold (Eds.),

Handbook of psychology and education. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Dweck, C. (2000). Self-theories: Their role in motivation, personality, and development. Philadelphia, PA: Psychology

Press.

592

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in592 592

10/17/08 10:04:43 AM

REFERENCES

Dweck, C. S. (1986). Motivational processes affecting learning.

American Psychologist, 41, 1040

–1048.

Dweck, C. S. (1999). Self-theories: Their role in motivation, personality and development. Philadelphia: Taylor &

Francis.

Dweck, C. S. (2002). The development of ability conceptions. In

A. Wig

ﬁeld & J. S. Eccles (Eds.), Development of achievement motivation (pp. 57–88). New York: Academic Press.

Dweck, C. S., & Bush, E. S. (1976). Sex differences in learned helplessness: I. Differential debilitation with peer and

adult evaluators. Developmental Psychology, 12, 147

–156.

Dweck, C., Davidson, W., Nelson, S., & Enna, B. (1978). Sex differences in learned helplessness: II. The

contingencies of evaluative feedback in the classroom and III. An experimental analysis. Developmental
Psychology, 14, 268

–276.

Dweck, C. S., Goetz, T. , & Strauss, N. L. (1980). Sex differences in learned helplessness: IV. An experimental and

naturalistic study of failure generalization and its mediators. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 38,
441

–452.

Dweck, C., & Goetz, T. (1978). Attributions and learned helplessness. In W. Harvey & R. Kidd (Eds.), New directions

in attribution research. Vol. 2 (pp. 157

–179). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Dweck, C. S., & Leggett, E. L. (1988). A social-cognitive approach to motivation and personality.

Psychological Review, 95, 256

–273.

Dwyer, K., Osher, D., & Warger, C. (1998). Early warning, timely response: A guide to safe schools. Washington,

DC: U.S. Department of Education.

Dweck, C. S., & Sorich, L. (1999). Mastery-oriented thinking. In

C. R. Snyder (Ed.), Coping. New York: Oxford University Press.

Eamon, M. K. (2001). Poverty, parenting, peer and neighborhood in

ﬂuences on young adolescent antisocial

behavior. Journal of Social Service Research, 28(1), 1

–23.

Earl, L., & Katz, S. (2006). Rethinking classroom assessment with purpose in mind. Western and Northern Canadian

Protocol for Collaboration in Education (WNCP). Available online at http://www.wncp.ca/.

Earl, L. M. (2003). Assessment as learning: Using classroom assessment to maximize student learning. Thousand

Oaks, CA: Corwin Press.

Ebbinghaus, H. (1885). Uber das Gedachtnis. Leipzig: Duncker &

Humblot. Cited in R. Klatzky (1980), Human memory: Structures and processes. San Francisco: Freeman.

Ebel, R. L. (1979). Essentials of educational measurement (3rd ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Ebel, R. L., & Frisbie, D. A. (1991). Essentials of educational measurement (5th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ:

Pearson Merrill/ Prentice Hall.

Ebmeier, H., & Good, T. L. (1979). The effects of instructing teachers about good teaching on mathematics

achievement of fourth grade students. American Educational Research Journal, 16(1), 1016.

Eccles, I., Midgley, C., & Adler, T. F. (1984). Grade-related changes in the school environment: Effects on

achievement motivation. In J. G. Nicholls (Ed.), The development of achievement motivation, Vol. 3 (pp. 283

–331).

Greenwich, CT: JAI Press.

Eccles, J. (1993). School and family effects on the ontogeny of children

‘s interests, self-perceptions, and activity

choice. In
J. Jacobs (Ed.), Nebraska Symposium on Motivation, 1992: Developmental perspectives on motivation (pp.
145

–208). Lincoln, NE: University of Nebraska Press.

Eccles, J., Barber, B., Jozefowicz, D., Malenchuk, O., & Vida, M.

(2000). Self-evaluations of competence, task values, and self-esteem. In N. Johnson, M. Roberts, & J. Worrell
(Eds.), Girls and adolescence (pp. 53

–84). Washington, DC: APA Press.

Eccles, J., Roeser, R., Wig

ﬁeld, A., & Freedman-Doan, C. (1999).

Academic and motivational pathways through middle childhood. In L. Balter & C. Tamis-LeMonda (Eds.),
Child psychology: A handbook of contemporary issues (pp. 287

–317). Philadelphia, PA: Psychology Press.

Eccles, J. S. (2005). Subjective task value and the Eccles et al. model of achievement-related choices. In A. J. Elliot

& C. S. Dweck (Eds.), Handbook of competence and motivation (pp. 105

–121). New York: Guilford.

Eccles, J. S., Adler, T. F., Futterman, R., Goff, S. B., Kaczala,

C. M., & Meece, J. L. (1983). Expectancies, values and academic behaviors. In J. T. Spence (Ed.),
Achievement and achievement motives (pp. 75

–146). San Francisco: Freeman.

Eccles, J. S., Early, D., Frasier, K., Belansky, E., & McCarthy, K.

(1996). The relation of connection, regulation, and support for autonomy to adolescents

‘ functioning. Journal of

Adolescent Research, 12, 263

–286.

Eccles, J. S., & Jacobs, J. (1986). Social forces shape math attitudes and performance. Signs, 11, 367

–389.

Eccles, J. S., Midgley, C., Wig

ﬁeld, A., Miller-Buchannan, C.,

Reuman, D., Flanagan, C., & Maclver, D. (1993). Development during adolescence: The impact of
stage-environment

ﬁt on young adolescents‘ experiences in schools and families. American Psychologist, 48,

–101.

Eccles, J. S., Wig

ﬁeld, A., Harold, R. D., & Blumenfeld, P. (1993).

Age and gender differences in children

‘s self and task perceptions during elementary school. Child Development,

64, 830

–847.

Eccles, J. S., Wig

ﬁeld, A., & Schiefele, U. (1998). Motivation to succeed. In N. Eisenberg (Ed.), Handbook of child

psychology: Vol. 3. Social, emotional, and personality development (5th ed., pp. 1017

–1095). New York: Wiley.

Edelman, G. R. (1992). Bright air, brilliant

ﬁre: On the matter of the mind. New York: Basic Books.

Edelson, E. (1988). Nutrition and the brain. New York: Chelsea

House.

Eder, D. (1983). Ability grouping and students

‘ academic self-concepts: A case study. Elementary School Journal,

84, 149

–161.

Egger, H. L., Costello, E. J., Erkanli, A., & Angold, A. (1999).

Somatic complaints and psychopathology in children and adolescents: Stomach aches,
musculoskeletal pains, and headaches. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry,
38, 852

–860.

references

593

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in593 593

10/17/08 10:04:45 AM

REFERENCES

Ehlers, S., & Gillberg, C. (1993). The epidemiology of Asperger syndrome. A total population study. Journal of Child

Psychology and Psychiatry, 34, 1327

–1350.

Eibl-Eibesfeldt, I. (1971). Love and hate: The natural history of behavior patterns. New York: Holt, Rinehart, &

Winston.

Eikeseth, S. (in press). Outcome of comprehensive psycho-educational interventions for young

children with autism. Research in Developmental Disabilities.

Eisenberg, N. (1982). The development of reasoning regarding prosocial behavior. In N. Eisenberg (Ed.), The

development of prosocial behavior. San Diego, CA: Academic Press.

Eisenberg, N. (1986). Altruistic emotion, cognition and behavior.

Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Eisenberg, N., & Fabes, R. A. (1998). Prosocial development. In

W. Damon (Series Ed.) & N. Eisenberg (Vol. Ed.), Handbook of child psychology: Vol. 3. Social, emotional, and
personality development. New York: Wiley.

Eisenberg, N., Martin, C. L., & Fabes, R. (1996). Gender development and gender effects. In D. C. Berliner & R. C.

Calfee (Eds.), Handbook of educational psychology. New York: Simon & Schuster Macmillan.

Eisenberg, N., Shell, R., Pasternack, J., Lennon, R., Beller, R., &

Mathy, R. M. (1987). Prosocial development in middle childhood: A longitudinal study. Developmental
Psychology, 23, 712

–718.

Eisenberg, N., Spinrad, T., & Sadovsky, A. (2006). Empathy-related responding in children. In M. Killen

& J. Smetana (Eds.), Handbook of moral development. Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Eisner, E. W. (1985). The educational imagination. New York:

Macmillan.

Ekman, P. (1994). Strong evidence for universals in facial expressions: A reply to Russell

‘s mistaken critique.

Psychological Bulletin, 115, 268

–287.

Elfenbein, H. A. (2006). Learning in emotion judgments: Training and the cross-cultural understanding of

facial expressions. Journal of Non-Verbal Behavior, 30(1), 21

–36.

Elias, M. J. (2004). The connection between social-emotional learning and learning disabilities: Implications for

intervention. Learning Disability Quarterly, 27(1), 53

–63.

Elias, M. J., & Schwab, Y. (2006). From compliance to responsibility: Social and emotional learning and classroom

management. In C. Evertson & C. S. Weinstein (Eds.), Handbook for classroom management: Research, practice,
and contemporary issues (pp. 309

–341). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Elias, M. J., Tobias, S. E., & Freidlander, B. S. (1999). Emotionally intelligent parenting. New York:

Harmony/Random House.

Elias, M. J., & Weissberg, R. P. (2000). Primary prevention: Educational approaches to enhance social and

emotional learning. Journal of School Health, 70(5), 186

–190.

Elias, M. J., Zins, J. E., Weissberg, R. P., Frey, K. S., Greenberg, M.

T., Haynes, N. M., Kessler, R., Schwab-Stone, M. E., & Shriver,
T. P. (1997). Promoting social and emotional learning: Guidelines for educators. Alexandria, VA: Association
for Supervision and Curriculum Development.

Elkind, D. (1967). Egocentrism in adolescence. Child Development, 38, 1025

–1034.

Elliot, A. J., & Church, M. A. (1997). A hierarchical model of approach and avoidance achievement motivation.

Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 72, 218

–232.

Elliot, A. J., & McGregor, H. A. (2001). A 2 _ 2 achievement goal framework. Journal of Personality and Social

Psychology, 80(3), 501

–519.

Elliot, S. N., McKeviit, B. C., & Kettler, R. J. (2002). Testing accommodations, research, and decision making. The

case of

‗good‘ scores being highly valued but difﬁcult to achieve for all students. Measurement & Evaluation in

Counseling & Development, 35, 153-166.

Ellis, A. K. (2001). Teaching for intelligence. In A. K. Ellis (Ed.),

Research on educational innovations. Larchmont, New York: Eye on Education.

Emmer, E. T., & Evertson, C. M. (1981). Synthesis of research on classroom management. Educational

Leadership 38(4), 342

–347.

Emmer, E. T., Evertson, C. M., & Anderson, L. M. (1980). Effective classroom management at the beginning of the

school year. Elementary School Journal, 80(5), 219

–231.

Emmer, E. T., Evertson, C. M., & Worsham, M. E. (2000). Classroom management for secondary teachers (5th

ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

Emmer, E. T., Evertson, C. M., & Worsham, M. E. (2006). Classroom management for middle and high

school teachers (7th ed.). Boston: Pearson Education.

Emmer, E. T., & Stough, L. M. (2001). Classroom management:

A critical part of educational psychology, with implications for teacher education. Educational Psychologist, 36,
103

–112.

Engle, R., & Kane, M. J. (2004). Executive attention, working memory capacity, and a two-factor theory of cognitive

control. In B. Ross (Ed.), The psychology of learning and motivation (Vol. 44, pp. 145

–199). New York: Elsevier.

Engle, R. W., Nations, J. K., & Cantor, J. (1990). Is

―working memory capacity‖ just another name for word

knowledge? Journal of Educational Psychology, 82(4), 799

–804.

Enkenberg, J. (2001). Instructional design and emerging models in higher education. Computers in Human

Behavior, 17, 495

–506.

Ennett, S. T., & Bauman, K. E. (1993). Peer group structure and adolescent cigarette smoking: A social

network analysis. Journal of Health and Social Behavior, 34(3), 226

–236.

Ennett, S. T., & Bauman, K. E. (1994). The contribution of in

ﬂuence and selection to adolescent peer group

homogeneity: The case of adolescent cigarette smoking. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 67(4),
653

–663.

Ennis, R. (1996). Critical thinking dispositions: Their nature and assessability. Informal Logic, 18(2

–3), 165–182.

Epstein, J. L., & MacIver, D. J. (1992). Opportunities to learn:

Effects on eighth graders of curriculum offerings and instructional approaches (Report no. 34).
Baltimore: Center for Research on Elementary and Middle Schools, Johns Hopkins University.

Epstein, M. H., Kinder, D., & Bursuck, D. (1989). The academic status of adolescents with behavioral disorders.

Behavioral Disorders, 14, 157

–165.

594

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in594 594

10/17/08 10:04:47 AM

REFERENCES

Erhardt, D., & Hinshaw, S. P. (1994). Initial sociometric impressions of attention-de

ﬁcit hyperactivity disorder

and comparison boys: Predictions from social behaviours and from nonbehavioural variables. Journal of
Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 62, 833

–842.

Erikson, E. H. (1959/1980). Identity and the life cycle. New York:

Norton.

Esposito, C. (1999). Learning in urban blight: School climate and its effects on the school performance of urban,

minority, low-income children. School Psychology Review, 28(3), 365

–377.

Esquivel, G. B. (1995). Teacher behaviors that foster creativity.

Educational Psychology Review, 7, 185

–202.

Esterlee, J., & Clurman, D. (1993). Conversations with critical thinkers. San Francisco: The Whitman Institute.
Evans, G. W. (2004). The environment of childhood poverty.

American Psychologist, 59, 77

–92.

Evans, G. W., & English, K. (2002). The environment of poverty:

Multiple stressor exposure, psychophysiological stress, and socioemotional adjustment. Child Development, 73,
1238

–1248.

Evans, S. W., Axelrod, J. L., & Sapia, J. L. (2000). Effective school-based mental health

interventions: Advancing the social skills training paradigm. Journal of Social Health, 70, 191

–194.

Evans, W., Evans, S., Gable, R., & Schmid, R. (1991). Instructional management for detecting and correcting

special problems. Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

Evertson., C. (1989). Improving classroom management: A school-based program for beginning the year.

Journal of Educational Research 83(2), 82

–90.

Evertson, C., & Emmer, E. (1982). Effective classroom management at the beginning of the year in junior high

classes. Journal of Educational Psychology, 74, 485

–498.

Evertson, C. M., Emmer, E. T., & Worsham, M. E. (2006). Classroom management for elementary teachers. (7th

ed.) Boston: Pearson Education.

Facione, F. G., Facione, N. C., & Giancarlo, C. A. (2000). The disposition toward critical thinking: Its character,

measurement, and relationship to critical thinking skill. Informal Logic, 20(1), 61

– 84.

Fan, X., Chen, M., & Matsumoto, A. R. (1997). Gender differences in mathematics achievement:

Findings from the National Education Longitudinal Study of 1988. Journal of Experimental Education, 65(3),
229

–242.

Fantuzzo, J. W., Riggio, R. E., Connelly, S., & Dimeff, L. A. (1989).

Effects of reciprocal peer tutoring on academic achievement and psychological adjustment: A component analysis.
Journal of Educational Psychology, 81, 173

–177.

Farlow, L. (1995). Cooperative learning to facilitate the inclusion of students with moderate to severe mental

retardation in secondary subject-area classes. Paper presented at the annual conference of the American
Association on Mental Retardation, Boston, June 1995. Eric Document (ED 375 541).

Farmer, T. W., Estell, D. B., Bishop, J. L., O

’Neal, K. K., & Cairns,

B. D. (2003). Rejected bullies or popular leaders? The social relations of aggressive subtypes of rural African
American early adolescents. Developmental Psychology, 39(6), 992

–1004.

Farris, P., Fuhler, C., & Walther, M. (2004). Teaching reading: A balanced approach for today

’s classrooms. Boston:

McGraw-Hill.

Fay, J., & Funk, D. (1995). Teaching with love and logic. Golden,

CO: Love and Logic Press.

Feldhusen, J. F., & Moon, S. M. (1992). Grouping gifted students: Issues and concerns. Gifted Child Quarterly, 36,

–67.

Feldlaufer, H., Midgley, C., & Eccles, J. S. (1988). Student, teacher, and observer perceptions of the

classroom environment before and after the transition to junior high school. Journal of Early Adolescence, 8,
133

–156.

Fenson, L., Dale, P. S., Reznick, J. S., Bates, E., Thal, D. J., &

Pethick, S. J. (1994). Variability in early communicative development. Monographs of the Society for Research in
Child Development, 59 (5, Serial No. 242).

Fernald, A. (1985). Four-month-old infants prefer to listen to

―motherese.‖ Infant Behavior and Development, 8,

181

–195.

Fey, M., Long, S., & Finestack, L. (2003, February). Ten principles of grammar facilitation for children with speci

ﬁc

language impairments. American Journal of Speech

–Language Pathology, 12, 3–15.

Fielder, E. D., Lange, R. E., & Winebrenner, S. (1993). In search of reality: Unraveling the myths about tracking,

ability grouping and the gifted. Roeper Review, 16, 4

–7.

Fierros, E. G., & Conroy, J. E. (2002). Double jeopardy: An exploration of restrictiveness of race in special

education. In D. Losen (Ed.), Minority issues in special education (pp. 39

–70). Cambridge, MA: The Civil Rights

Project, Harvard University and Harvard Education Publishing Group.

Filby, N. N., & Barnett, B. G. (1982). Student perceptions of

―better readers‖ in elementary classrooms.

Elementary School Journal, 82, 435

–449.

Filipek, P. A., Accardo, P. J., Baranek, G. T., Cook, E. H. Jr., Dawson, G., Gordon, B., Gravel, J. S., Johnson,

C. P., Kallen, R. J., Levy, S. E., Minshew, N. J., Ozonoff, S., Prizant, B. M., Rapin,
I., Rogers, S. J., Stone, W. L., Teplin, S., Tuchman, R. F., & Volkmar, F. R. (1999). The screening and diagnosis
of autism spectrum disorders. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 29(6), 439

–484.

Fine, M. A., & Harvey, J. H. (2006). Divorce and relationship dissolution in the 21st century. In M. A. Fine & J. H.

Harvey (Eds.), Handbook of divorce and remarriage. Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Fingerhut, L. A., & Christoffel, K. K. (2002). Firearm-related death and injury among children and

adolescents. Future of Children, 12(2), 25

–37.

Finley, M. K. (1984). Teachers and tracking in a comprehensive high school. Sociology of Education, 57, 233

–243.

Fischer, L., Schimmel, D, & Kelly, C. (1999). Teachers and the law. New York: Longman.
Fischer, W. W., & Mazur, J. E. (1997). Basic and applied research on choice responding. Journal of Applied

Behavior Analysis, 30, 387

–410.

Fisher, A., & Scriven, M. (1997). Critical thinking: Its de

ﬁnition and assessment. Point Reyes, CA: Edge Press.

references

595

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in595 595

10/17/08 10:04:49 AM

REFERENCES

Fisher, C. W., Berliner, D. C., Filby, N. N., Marliave, R., Ghen,

L. S., & Dishaw, M. M. (1980). Teaching behaviors, academic learning time, and student achievement: An

overview. In
C. Denham & A. Lieberman (Eds.), Time to learn (pp. 7

–22). Washington, DC: National Institute of Education.

Flavell, J. H. (2000). Development of children

‘s knowledge about the mental world. International Journal of

Behavioral Development, 24, 15

–23.

Flavell, J. H. (2004). Theory-of-mind development: Retrospect and prospect. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 50, 274

–290.

Flavell, J. H., Flavell, E. R., & Green, F. L. (1983). Development of the appearance

–reality distinction. Cognitive

Psychology, 15, 95

–120.

Flavell, J. H., Green, F. L., & Flavell, E. R. (1995). Young children

’s knowledge about thinking: Monographs of the

Society for Research in Child Development.

Flavell, J. H., Green, F. L., & Flavell, E. R. (2000). Development of children

‘s awareness of their own thoughts.

Journal of Cognition and Development, 1, 97

–112.

Flavell, J. H., Miller, P. H., & Miller, S. A. (2002). Cognitive development (4th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice

Hall.

Fleischner, J. E. (1994). Diagnosis and assessment of mathematics learning disabilities. In G. R. Lyon (Ed.), Frames

of reference for the assessment of learning disabilities: New views on measurement issues (pp. 459

–472).

Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes.

Fleith, D. (2000). Teacher and student perceptions of creativity in the classroom environment. Roeper Review, 22,

148

–157.

Fletcher, J. M., Shaywitz, S. E., Shankweiler, D. P., Katz, L., Liberman, I. Y., Stuebing, K. K., et al. (1994).

Cognitive pro

ﬁles of reading disability: Comparisons of discrepancy and low achievement deﬁnitions. Journal of

Educational Psychology, 86(1), 6

–23.

Fletcher, T., & Spielberger, C. (1995). Comparison of cognitive therapy and rational-emotive therapy in the

treatment of test anxiety. In C. Spielberger & P. Vagg (Eds.), Test anxiety: Theory, assessment, and treatment (pp.
153

–169). Washington, DC: Taylor & Francis.

Flood, W. A., Wilder, D. A., Flood, A. L., & Masuda, A. (2002).

Peer-mediated reinforcement plus prompting as treatment for off-task behavior in children with Attention De

ﬁcit

Hyperactivity Disorder. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 35, 199

–204.

Floyd, C. (1954). Meeting children

‘s reading needs in the middle grades: A preliminary report. Elementary School

Journal, 55, 99

–103.

Flynn, J. R. (1984). The mean IQ of Americans: Massive gains

1932 to 1978. Psychological Bulletin, 95, 29

–51.

Flynn, J. R. (1994). IQ gains over time. In R. J. Sternberg (Ed.),

Encyclopedia of human intelligence (pp. 617

–623). New York: Macmillan.

Fombonne, E. (1999). The epidemiology of autism: A review.

Psychological Medicine, 29, 769

–786.

Foorman, B. R., Francis, D. J., Winikates, P. M., Schatschneider,

C., & Fletcher, J. M. (1997). Early interventions for children with reading disabilities. Scienti

ﬁc Studies of Reading,

1(3), 255

–276.

Forehand, R., Thomas, A. M., Wierson, M., Brody, G., & Fauber,

R. (1990). Role of maternal functioning and parenting skills in adolescent functioning following parental divorce.
Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 99(3), 278

–283.

Forsterling, F. (1985). Attributional retraining: A review. Psychological Bulletin, 98, 495

–512.

Foster, S. L. (2005). Aggression and antisocial behavior in girls.

In D. J. Bell, S. L. Foster, & E. J. Mash (Eds.), Handbook of behavioral and emotional problems in girls (pp.
149

–180). New York: Kluwer Academic/Plenum.

Fouad, N. A., & Smith, P. L. (1996). A test of a social cognitive model for middle school students: Math and science.

Journal of Counseling Psychology, 43, 338

–346.

Frankenberger, K. D. (2000). Adolescent egocentrism: A comparison among adolescents and adults. Journal

of Adolescence, 23, 343

–354.

Franklin, C., & Streeter, C. L. (1995). Assessment of middle class youth at-risk to dropout: School, psychologist and

family correlates. Children and Youth Services Review, 77, 433

–448.

Frazier, T. W., Youngstrom, E. A., Glutting, J. J., & Watkins,

M. W. (2007). ADHD and achievement: Meta-analysis of the child, adolescent, and adult literatures and a
concomitant study with college students. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 40(1), 49

–65.

Freedman-Doan, C., Wig

ﬁeld, A., Eccles, J., Blumenfeld, P., Ar-breton, A., & Harold, R. (2000). What am I best

at? Grade and gender differences in children

‘s beliefs about ability improvement. Journal of Applied Developmental

Psychology, 21, 379

–402.

Freeland, J. T., & Noell, G. H. (1999). Maintaining accurate math responses in elementary school students: The

effects of delayed intermittent reinforcement and programming common stimuli. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 32, 211

–215.

Freeman, J. (1995). Annotation: Recent studies of giftedness in children. Journal of Child Psychology and

Psychiatry, 36(4), 531

–547.

Freeman, J. B., Garcia, A. M., & Leonard, H. L. (2002). Anxiety disorders. In M. Lewis (Ed.), Child and adolescent

psychiatry: A comprehensive textbook (3rd ed., pp. 821

–834). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.

Fuchs, D., & Thelen, M. H. (1988). Children

‘s expected interpersonal consequences of communicating their affective

state and reported likelihood of expression. Child Development, 59, 1314

–1322.

Fuchs, L. S., Fuchs, D., Kams, K., Hamlett, C. L., & Karzaroff, M.

(1999). Mathematics performance assessment in the classroom: Effects on teacher planning and student problem
solving. American Educational Research Journal, 36, 609

–646.

Fuchs, L. S., Fuchs, D., Kams, K., Hamlett, C. L., Katzaroff, M.,

& Dutka, S. (1997). Effects of task-focused goals on low-achieving students with and without
learning disabilities. American Educational Research Journal, 34, 513

–543.

Fuchs, L. S., Fuchs, D., Prentice, K., Burch, M., Hamlett, C. L.,

Owen, R., Hosp, M., & Jancek, D. (2003). Explicitly teaching for transfer: Effects on third-grade students

‘

mathematical problem solving. Journal of Educational Psychology, 95, 293

–305.

596

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in596 596

10/17/08 10:04:51 AM

REFERENCES

Fujiura, G. T., & Yamaki, K. (2000). Trends in demography of childhood poverty and disability. Exceptional

Children, 66, 187

–199.

Gage, N. L., & Berliner, D. C. (1992). Educational psychology (5th ed.). Boston: Houghton Mif

ﬂin.

Gajria, M., Jitendra, A. K., Sood, S., & Sacks, G. (2007). Improving comprehension of expository text in students

with LD: A research synthesis. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 40(3), 210

–225.

Galambos, N. L. (2004). Gender and gender role development in adolescence. In R. M. Lerner & L. Steinberg (Eds.),

Handbook of adolescent psychology (2nd ed.). Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.

Galati, D., Scherer, K. R., & Ricci-Bitti, P. E. (1997). Voluntary facial expression of emotion: Comparing

congenitally blind with normally sighted encoders. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 73, 1363

–1379.

Gallagher, H., & Gallagher, S. (1994). Teaching the gifted child.

Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

Gallagher, J. J. (1992). Gifted persons. In M. C. Alkin (Ed.), Encyclopedia of educational research (Vol. 2, pp.

544

–549). New York: Macmillan.

Gallimore, R., & Goldenberg, C. (1992). Mapping teachers

‘

Zone of Proximal Development: A Vygotskian perspective on teaching and teacher training. In F. Oser, A. Dick, &

J.-L. Patry (Eds.), Effective and responsible teaching: The new synthesis (pp. 203

–221). San Francisco:

Jossey-Bass.

Gallimore, R., & Tharp, R. (1990). Teaching mind in society:

Teaching, schooling, and literate discourse. In L. C. Moll (Ed.), Vygotsky and education (pp. 175

–205). Cambridge,

UK: Cambridge University Press.

Gamoran, A. (1990, April). The consequences of track-related instructional differences for student achievement.

Paper presented at the annual meeting of the American Educational Research Association, Boston.

Gamoran, A. (1992). Is ability grouping equitable? Educational

Leadership, 50(2), 11

–17.

Gamoran, A. (1993). Alternative uses of ability grouping in secondary schools: Can we bring high-quality instruction

to low-ability classes? American Journal of Education, 102(1), 1

–22.

Gamoran, A., & Weinstein, M. (1998). Differentiation and opportunity in restructured schools. American Journal of

Education, 106, 385

–415.

Garbarino, J., & deLara, E. (2002). And words can hurt forever:

How to protect adolescents from bullying, harassment, and emotional violence. New York: Free Press.

Garber, J., & Horowitz, J. L. (2002). Depression in children. In

C. L. Hammen & I. H. Gotlib (Eds.), Handbook of depression (pp. 510

–540). New York: Guilford.

García, E. E. (1992).

―Hispanic‖ children: Theoretical, empirical, and related policy issues. Educational

Psychology Review, 4(1), 69

–93.

García, E. E. (1995). Educating Mexican American students: Past treatment and recent developments in theory,

research, policy, and practice. In J. A. Banks & C. A. M. Banks (Eds.), Handbook of research on multicultural
education (pp. 491

–514). New York: Macmillan.

Garcia, G. E. (1991). Factors affecting the English reading test performance of Spanish-speaking Hispanic students.

Reading Research Quarterly, 26, 371

–392.

Garcia, G. E., & Pearson, P. D. (1994). Assessment and diversity.

Review of Research in Education, 20, 337

–391.

Gardner, H. (1983). Frames of mind: The theory of multiple intelligences. New York: Basic Books.

Gardner, H. (1991). The unschooled mind: How children think and how schools should teach. New York: Basic Books.

Gardner, H. (1993). Introduction to the tenth-anniversary edition. Frames of mind: The theory of multiple
intelligences. New York: Basic Books.
Gardner, H. (1995). Re

ﬂections on multiple intelligences: Myths and messages. Phi Delta Kappan, 77(3), 200–203.

Gardner, H. (1999). Intelligence reframed: Multiple intelligences for the 21st century. New York: Basic Books.
Gardner, H. (2000). The disciplined mind: Beyond facts and standardized tests, the K

–12 education

that every child deserves. New York: Penguin Books.

Gardner, H., & Moran, S. (2006). The science of multiple intelligences theory: A response to Lynn Waterhouse.

Educational Psychologist, 41(4), 227

–232.

Garlick, D. (2003). Integrating brain science research with intelligence research. Current Directions in Psychological

Science, 12(5), 185

–189.

Garnett, K. (1992). Developing

ﬂuency with basic number facts:

Intervention for students with learning disabilities. Learning Disabilities Research & Practice, 7, 210

–216.

Garrison, D. R., Anderson, T., & Archer, W. (2001). Critical thinking, cognitive presence, and computer

conferencing in distance education. American Journal of Distance Education, 15(1), 7

–23.

Gathercoal, F. (1993). Judicious discipline (3rd ed.). San Francisco: Caddo Gap Press.

Gathercoal, P., & Crowell, R. (2000). Judicious discipline. Kappa

Delta Pi, 36(4), 173

–177.

Gathercole, S. E., Pinkering, S. J., Knight, C., & Stegman, Z.

(2004). Working memory skills and educational attainment: Evidence from national curriculum assessments at 7
and 14 years of age. Applied Cognitive Psychology, 18, 1

–16.

Gavazzi, S., & Sabatelli, R. M. (1990). Family system dynamics, the individuation process, and psychosocial

development. Journal of Adolescent Research, 5, 500

–519.

Gay, G. (2000). Culturally responsive teaching: Theory, research, and practice. New York: Teachers College Press.
Geary, D. (1990). A componential analysis of an early learning de

ﬁcit in mathematics. Journal of Experimental Child

Psychology, 33, 386

–404.

Geary, D. C. (1993). Mathematical disabilities: Cognitive, neuropsychological, and genetic components.

Psychological Bulletin, 114, 345

–362.

Geary, D. C. (1994). Children

’s mathematical development: Research and practical applications. Washington, DC:

American Psychological Association.

references

597

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in597 597

10/17/08 10:04:53 AM

REFERENCES

Geary, D. C. (1996). Sexual selection and sex differences in mathematical abilities. Behavioral and

Brain Sciences, 19, 229

–284.

Geary, D. C. (2004). Mathematics and learning disabilities. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 37(1), 4

–15.

Geary, D. C., & Hoard, M. K. (2005). Learning disabilities in arithmetic and mathematics: Theoretical

and empirical perspectives. In J. I. D. Campbell (Ed.), Handbook of mathematical cognition (pp. 253

–267). New

York: Psychology Press.

Geban, O., Askar, P., & Ozkan, I. (1992). Effects of computer simulations and problem solving approaches on high

school students. Journal of Educational Research, 86(1), 5

–10.

Gehlbach, H. (2004). A new perspective on perspective taking:

A multidimensional approach to conceptualizing an aptitude. Educational Psychology Review, 16, 207

–234.

Genesee, F., & Nicoladis, E. (1995). Language development in bilingual preschool children. In E. E. Garcia & B.

McLaughlin (Eds.), Meeting the challenge of linguistic and cultural diversity in early childhood education (pp.
18

–33). New York: Teachers College Press.

Genesee, F., Paradis, J., & Crago, M. (2004). Dual language development & disorders: A handbook on bilingualism

& second language learning. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes.

Genshaft, J. L., Bireley, M., & Hollinger, C. L. (1995). Serving gifted and talented students: A resource for school

personnel. Austin, TX: Pro-Ed.

Gentner, D., & Gentner, D. R. (1983). Flowing waters or teeming crowds: Mental models of electricity. In D. Gentner

&
A. L. Stevens (Eds.), Mental models (pp. 99

–129). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Gettinger, M. (1988). Methods of proactive classroom management. School Psychology Review, 17, 227

–242.

Getzels, J. W., & Csikszentmihalyi, M. (1976). The creative vision: A longitudinal study of problem

–ﬁnding

in art. New York: Wiley.

Gibbs, J. C. (1991). Sociomoral developmental delay and cognitive distortion: Implications for the treatment of

antisocial youth. In W. M. Kurtines & J. L. Gewirtz (Eds.), Handbook of moral behavior and development: Vol. 3.
Application. Hills-dale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Gibson, S., & Dembo, M. (1984). Teacher ef

ﬁcacy: A construct validation. Journal of Educational Psychology, 76,

569

–582.

Gick, M. L., & Holyoak, K. J. (1980). Analogical problem solving.

Cognitive Psychology, 12, 306

–355.

Gick, M. L., & Holyoak, K. J. (1983). Schema induction and analogical transfer. Cognitive Psychology, 15, 1

–38.

Gick, M. L., & Holyoak, K. J. (1987). The cognitive basis for knowledge transfer. In S. M. Cormier & J.

D. Hagman (Eds.), Transfer of learning (pp. 9

–46). New York: Academic Press.

Giedd, J. N., Blumenthal, J., Jeffries, N. O., et al. (1999). Brain development during childhood and adolescence: a

longitudinal MRI study. Nature Neuroscience, 2(10): 861

–863.

Gilligan, C. (1977). In a different voice: Women

‘s conception of the self and of morality. Harvard Educational Review,

47, 481

–517.

Ginott, H. G. (1972). Teacher and child. New York: Macmillan.
Ginsburg, G. E, & Kilbourne, B. K. (1988). Emergence of vocal alternation in mother

–infant interchanges. Journal of

Child Language, 15, 221

–235.

Glachan, M., & Light, P. H. (1982). Peer interaction and learning. In G. E. Butterworth & P. H. Light (Eds.), Social

cognition: Studies of the development of understanding (pp. 238

–260). Brighton, UK: Harvester Press.

Glasser, W. (1969). Schools without failure. New York: Harper &

Row.

Glasser, W. (1998). Choice theory in the classroom. New York:

HarperCollins.

Glynn, S. M., Britton, B. K., Muth, D., & Dogan, N. (1982). Writing and revising persuasive documents: Cognitive

demands. Journal of Educational Psychology, 74, 557

–567.

Gnepp, J., & Gould, M. E. (1985). The development of personalized inferences: Understanding other people

‘s

emotional reactions in light of their prior experiences. Child Development, 56, 1455

–1464.

Goddard, R. D., Hoy, W. K., & Woolfolk Hoy, A. (2000). Collective teacher ef

ﬁcacy: Its meaning, measure, and

impact on student achievement. American Educational Research Journal, 37, 479

–507.

Godden, D. R., & Baddeley, A. D. (1975). Context-dependant memory in two natural environments: On land and

underwater. British Journal of Psychology, 66, 325

–331.

Gogtay, N., Giedd, J. N., Lusk, L., Hayashi, K. M., Greenstein, D.,

Vaituzis, A. C., Nugent, T. F., Herman, D. H., Clasen, L. S., Toga,
A. W., Rapoport, J. L., & Thompson, P. M. (2004). Dynamic mapping of human cortical development during
childhood and early adulthood. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, 101(21), 8174

–8179.

Goldenberg, C. (1987). Low-income Hispanic parents

‘ contributions to their ﬁrst-grade children‘s

word-recognition skills. Anthropology and Education Quarterly, 18, 149

–179.

Goldenberg, C. (1992/1993). Instructional conversations: Promoting comprehension through discussion. Reading

Teacher, 46(4), 316

–326.

Gold

ﬁeld, B. E., & Snow, C. E. (2005). Individual differences:

Implications for the study of language acquisition. In J.
B. Gleason (Ed.), The development of language (6th ed.,
p. 292

–303). Boston: Pearson/Allyn & Bacon.

Goldin-Meadow, S., & Morford, M. (1985). Gesture in early child language: Studies of deaf and hearing

children. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 31, 145

–176.

Goldin-Meadow, S., & Mylander, C. (1983). Gestural communication in deaf children: Noneffect of parental input on

language development. Science, 221, 372

–374.

Goldstein, N. E., Arnold, D. H., Rosenber, J. L., Stowe, R. M., &

Ortiz, C. (2001). Contagion of aggression in day care classrooms as a function of peer and teacher responses.
Journal of Educational Psychology, 93, 708

–719.

Goleman, D. (1995). Emotional intelligence. New York: Bantam

Books.

Goleman, D. (2006). Introduction. In D. Goleman, Emotional intelligence. New York: Bantam Books.

598

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in598 598

10/17/08 10:04:55 AM

REFERENCES

Gonzalez, A. R., Holbein, M. R. D., & Quilter, S. (2002). High school students

‘ goal orientations and their

relationship to perceived parenting styles. Contemporary Educational Psychology, 27, 450

–470.

Good, T. L., Biddle, B. J., & Brophy, J. E. (1975). Teachers make a difference. New York: Holt, Rinehart, &

Winston.

Good, T. L., & Brophy, J. E. (2000). Looking in classrooms (8th ed.). New York: Longman.
Goodenow, C. (1993). The psychological sense of school membership among adolescents: Scale development and

educational correlates. Psychology in the Schools, 30, 79

–90.

Goodlad, J. I., & Anderson, R. H. (1987). The non-graded elementary school. New York: Teachers College Press.

Goodnow, J. J. (1962). A test of milieu effects with some of

Piaget

‘s tasks. Psychological Monographs, 76 (36, Whole No. 555).

Gootman, M. E. (1998). Effective in-house suspension. Educational Leadership, 56, 39

–41.

Gopnik, A., Meltzoff, A. N., & Kuhl, P. K. (1999). The scientist in the crib: What early learning tells us about the

mind. New York: Perennial/HarperCollins.

Gordon, G. L. (1999). Teacher talent and urban schools. Phi

Delta Kappan, 81(4), 304

–307.

Goswami, A, & Goswami, M. (1999). Quantum creativity: Waking up to our creative potential. Cresskill, NJ:

Hampton Press.

Goswami, U. (2006). Neuroscience and education: From research to practice? Nature Reviews

Neuroscience/Advance Online Publication. Published online 12 April 2006; doi:10.1038/ nrn1907.

Gottfried, A. E. (1990). Academic intrinsic motivation in young elementary school children. Journal of Educational

Psychology, 82, 525

–538.

Gottfried, A. E., Fleming, J. S., & Gottfried, A. W. (1994). Role of parental motivational practices in children

‘s

academic intrinsic motivation and achievement. Journal of Educational Psychology, 86, 104

–113.

Gottfried, A. E., Fleming, J. S., & Gottfried, A. W. (1998). Role of cognitively stimulating home environment in

children

‘s academic intrinsic motivation: A longitudinal study. Child Development, 69(5), 1448–1460.

Gottfried, A. E., Fleming, J. S., & Gottfried, A. W. (2001). Continuity of academic intrinsic motivation from

childhood through late adolescence: A longitudinal study. Journal of Educational Psychology, 93, 3

–13.

Gottfried, A. E., & Gottfried, A. W. (1996). A longitudinal study of academic intrinsic motivation in intellectually gifted

children: Childhood through early adolescence. Gifted Child Quarterly, 40, 179

–183.

Gottwald, S., Goldbach, P., & Isack, A. (1985). Stuttering: Prevention and detection. Young Children, 41(1), 9

–16.

Gough, D. (1991). Thinking about thinking. Alexandria, VA: National Association of Elementary School

Principals. ED 327 980.

Graham, S. (1984). Communicating sympathy and anger to black and white students: The cognitive

(attributional) consequences of affective cues. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 47, 40

–54.

Graham, S. (1990). Communicating low ability in the classroom: Bad things good teachers sometimes do.

In S. Graham & V. Folkes (Eds.), Attribution theory: Applications to achievement, mental health, and interpersonal
con

ﬂict (pp. 17–36). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Graham, S. (1994). Motivation in African Americans. Review of

Educational Research, 64(1), 55

–117.

Graham, S., & Barker, G. P. (1990). The down-side of help: An attributional-developmental analysis of helping

behavior as a low-ability cue. Journal of Educational Psychology, 82, 7

–14.

Graham, S., & Weiner, B. (1993). Attributional applications in the classroom. In T. M. Tomlinson (Ed.),

Motivating students to learn: Overcoming barriers to high achievement (pp. 179

–195). Berkeley, CA:

McCutchan.

Graham, S., & Weiner, B. (1996). Theories and principles of motivation. In D. C. Berliner & R. C. Calfee (Eds.),

Handbook of educational psychology (pp. 63

–84). New York: Macmillan.

Graham, S., Taylor, A., & Hudley, C. (1998). Exploring achievement values among ethnic minority early

adolescents. Journal of Educational Psychology, 90, 606

–620.

Grant, H., & Dweck, C. S. (2003). Clarifying achievement goals and their impact. Journal of Personality and Social

Psychology, 85, 541

–553.

Gray-Little, B., & Hafdahl, A. R. (2000). Factors in

ﬂuencing racial comparisons of self-esteem: A quantitative

review. Psychological Bulletin, 126, 26

–54.

Green, L., Fry, A. F., & Myerson, J. (1994). Discounting of delayed rewards: A life-span comparison. Psychological

Science, 5, 33

– 36.

Greenberg, M. T., Weissberg, R. P., O

’Brien, M. U., Zins, J. E.,

Fredricks, L., Resnik, H., & Elias, M. (2003). Enhancing school-based prevention and youth development through
coordinated social, emotional, and academic learning. American Psychologist, 58, 466

–474.

Green

ﬁeld, P. M. (1976). Cross-cultural research and Piagetian theory: Paradox and progress. In K. Riegel

& J. Meacham (Eds.), The developing individual in a changing world. The Hague, Netherlands:
Mouton.

Green

ﬁeld, P. M. (1997). You can‘t take it with you: Why ability assessments don‘t cross cultures. American

Psychologist, 52(10), 1115

–1124.

Greenlee, A., & Ogletree, E. (1993). Teachers

’ attitudes toward student discipline problems and classroom

management strategies. Washington, DC: U.S. Department of Education. ERIC Clearinghouse #PSO21851.

Greenough, W. T., Black, J. E., & Wallace, C. S. (1987). Experience and brain development. Child Development,

58, 539

–559.

Greenspan, S. (1981). Social competence and handicapped individuals: Practical implications and a proposed

model. Advances in Special Education, 3, 41

–82.

Greenwood, C. (2001). Science and students with learning and behavior problems. Behavioral Disorders, 27, 37

–52.

Gregory, R. J. (2007). Psychological testing: History, principles, and applications (5th ed.). Boston: Pearson.

references

599

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in599 599

10/17/08 10:04:57 AM

REFERENCES

Gresham, F. M. (1986). Conceptual issues in the assessment of social competence. In P. S. Strain, M. J. Guralnick,

& H. M. Walker (Eds.), Children

’s social behavior: Development, assessment, and modiﬁcation. Orlando, FL:

Academic Press.

Gresham, F. M., & Kern, L. (2004). Internalizing behavior problems in children and adolescents. In R. B.

Rutherford, Jr.,
M. M. Quinn, & S. Mathur (Eds.), Handbook of research in behavioral disorders (pp. 262

–281). New York: Guilford.

Gresham, F. M., Lane, K. L., & Beebe-Frankenberger, M. (2005).

Predictors of hyperactive-impulsive-inattention and conduct problems: A comparative follow-back investigation.
Psychology in the Schools, 42(7), 721

–736.

Grif

ﬁn, P., & Cole, M. (1999). Current activity for the future: The zo-ped. In P. Lloyd & C. Fernyhough (Eds.), Lev

Vygotsky: Critical assessments (pp. 276

–295). London: Routledge.

Grigorenko, E. L., Jarvin, L., & Sternberg, R. J. (2002). School-based tests of the triarchic theory of intelligence:

Three settings, three samples, three syllabi. Contemporary Educational Psychology, 27, 167

–208.

Grigorenko, E. L., & Sternberg, R. J. (1998). Dynamic testing.

Psychological Bulletin, 124, 75

–111.

Grolnick, W. S., Deci, E. L., & Ryan, R. M. (1997). Internalization within the family: The self-determination

perspective. In
J. E. Grusec & L. Kuczynski (Eds.), Parenting and children

’s internalization of values: A handbook of contemporary

theory (pp. 135

–161). New York: Wiley.

Grolnick, W. S., Gurland, S. T., Jacob, K. F., & DeCourcey, W.

(2002). The development of self-determination in middle childhood and adolescence. In A. Wig

ﬁeld & J.

Eccles (Eds.), Development of achievement motivation (pp. 147

–171). New York: Academic Press.

Gronlund, N. E. (2006). Assessment of student achievement (8th ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

Gross, M. (1993). Exceptionally gifted children. London:

Routledge.

Grotzer, T. A., & Perkins, D. A. (2000). Teaching of intelligence:

A performance conception. In R. J. Sternberg (Ed.), Handbook of intelligence (pp. 492

–515). New York: Cambridge

University Press.

Gruber, H. E. (1981). Darwin on man: A psychological study of scienti

ﬁc creativity (2nd ed.). Chicago: University of

Chicago Press.

Guay, F., Marsh, H. W., & Boivin, M. (2003). Academic self-concept and academic achievement:

Developmental perspectives on their causal ordering. Journal of Educational Psychology, 95, 124

–136.

Guerra, N. et al. (2007). Changing the way children

―think‖ about aggression: Social-cognitive effects of a

preventive intervention. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 75, 160

–167.

Guilford, J. P. (1956). The structure of intellect. Psychological

Bulletin, 53, 267

–293.

Guilford, J. P. (1988). Some changes in the structure-of-intellect model. Educational and Psychological

Measurement, 48, 1

–4.

Guskey, T., & Passaro, P. (1994). Teacher ef

ﬁcacy: A study of construct dimensions. American Educational

Research Journal, 31, 627

–643.

Guskey, T. R., & Bailey, J. M. (2001). Developing grading and reporting systems for student learning. Thousand

Oaks, CA: Corwin Press.

Gustafsson, J. E. (1994). Hierarchical models of intelligence and educational achievement. In A. Demetriou

& A. Efklides (Eds.), Intelligence, mind, and reasoning: Structure and development (pp. 45

–73). Amsterdam:

North-Holland/Elsevier Science.

Gutiérrez, K. D., Baquedano-López, P., & Asato, J. (2001). English for the children: The new literacy of the old

word order, language policy, and education reform. Bilingual Research Journal, 24(1 & 2), 87

–112.

Gutiérrez, R., & Slavin, R. E. (1992). Achievement effects of the nongraded elementary school: A best evidence

synthesis. Review of Educational Research, 62(4), 333

–376.

Gutman, L. M., Sameroff, A., & Cole, R. (2003). Academic growth curve trajectories from 1st grade to

12th grade: Effects of multiple social risks factors and preschool child factors. Developmental Psychology, 39,
777

–790.

Haladyna, T. M. (2002). Essentials of standardized achievement testing: validity and accountability. Boston: Pearson.
Haladyna, T. M., Downing, S. M., & Rodriquez, M. C. (2002). A review of multiple-choice item-writing guidelines for

classroom assessment. Applied Measurement in Education, 15(3), 309

–334.

Halberstadt, A. G. (1991). Toward an ecology of expressiveness:

Family socialization in particular and a model in general. In
R. S. Feldman & B. Rime (Eds.), Fundamentals of nonverbal behavior. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Halberstadt, A. G., & Eaton, K. L. (2002). Socialization of emotion expression, and understanding in the family.

Marriage and Family Review, 34, 35

–62.

Hallahan, D. P., & Kauffman. J. (2000). Exceptional learners (8th ed.). Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon.
Hallinan, M. T., & Sorensen, A. B. (1985). Class size, ability group size, and student achievement. American

Journal of Education, 94(1), 71

–89.

Hallinan, M. T., & Sorensøn, A. B. (1987). Ability grouping and sex differences in mathematics achievement.

Sociology of Education, 60, 63

–72.

Halpern, D. F. (1997). Sex differences in intelligence: Implications for education. American Psychologist, 52(10),

1091

–1101.

Halpern, D. F., & LaMay, M. L. (2000). The smarter sex: A critical review of sex differences in intelligence.

Educational Psychology Review, 12, 229

–246.

Hamacheck, D. (2000). Dynamics of self-understanding and self-knowledge: Acquisition, advantages,

and relation to emotional intelligence. Journal of Humanistic Counseling, Education & Development, 38(4),
230

–243.

Hambelton, R. K. (1996). Advances in assessment models, methods, and practices. In D. C. Berliner & R.

C. Calfee (Eds.), Handbook of educational psychology. New York: MacMillan.

Hamilton, R., & Ghatala, E. (1994). Learning and instruction.

New York: McGraw-Hill.

600

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in600 600

10/17/08 10:04:59 AM

REFERENCES

Hamm, J. V. (2000). Do birds of a feather

ﬂock together? The variable bases for African American, Asian American

and European American adolescents

‘ selection of similar friends. Developmental Psychology, 36(2),

209

–219.

Hammen, C., & Rudolph, K. D. (2003). Childhood mood disorders. In E. J. Mash & R. A. Barkley (Eds.), Child

psychopathology (2nd ed., pp. 233

–278). New York: Guilford.

Han, S. S., Catron, T., Weiss, B., & Marciel, K. K. (2005). A teacher-consultation approach to

social skills training for pre-kindergarten children: Treatment model and short-term outcome effects. Journal of
Abnormal Child Psychology, 33, 681

–693.

Hanich, L. B., Jordan, N. C., Kaplan, D., & Dick, J. (2001). Performance across different areas of mathematical

cognition in children with learning dif

ﬁculties. Journal of Educational Psychology, 93, 615–626.

Hanna, G. S., & Dettmer, P. A. (2004). Assessment for effective teaching: Using context-adaptive planning.

Boston: Pearson.

Hara, N., Bonk, C. J., & Angeli, C. (2000). Content analysis of online discussion in an applied educational

psychology course. Instructional Science, 28(2), 115

–152.

Harackiewicz, J. M., Barron, K. E., Pintrich, P. R., Elliot, A. J., &

Thrash, T. M. (2002). Revision of achievement goal theory: Necessary and illuminating. Journal of Educational
Psychology, 94, 562

–575.

Harackiewicz, J. M., Barron, K. E., Tauer, J. M., Carter, S. M., &

Elliot, A. J. (2000). Short-term and long-term consequences of achievement goals in college: Predicting continued
interest and performance over time. Journal of Educational Psychology, 92, 316

–330.

Harackiewicz, J., Manderlink, G., & Sansone, C. (1984). Rewarding pinball wizardry: The effects of evaluation on

intrinsic interest. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 47, 287

–300.

Harari, O., & Covington, M. V. (1981). Reactions to achievement behavior from a teacher and student perspective:

A developmental analysis. American Educational Research Journal, 18, 15

–28.

Hardre, P. L., & Reeve, J. (2003). A motivational model of rural students

‘ intention to persist in, versus drop out of,

high school. Journal of Educational Psychology, 95, 347

–356.

Hargis, C. H. (2006). Teaching low achieving and disadvantaged students (3rd ed.). Spring

ﬁeld, IL: Charles C.

Thomas.

Harkness, S. (1977). Aspects of social environment and

ﬁrst language acquisition in rural Africa. In C. Snow & C.

Ferguson (Eds.), Talking to children: Language input and acquisition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Harnishfeger, K. K. (1995). The development of cognitive inhibition: Theories, de

ﬁnitions, and research evidence. In

F. Dempster & C. Brainerd (Eds.), New perspectives in interference and inhibition in cognition. New York:
Academic Press.

Harp, S. F., & Mayer, R. E. (1997). The role of interest in learning from scienti

ﬁc text and illustrations: On the

distinction between emotional interest and cognitive interest. Journal of Educational Psychology, 89, 92

–102.

Harp, S. F., & Mayer, R. E. (1998). How seductive details do their damage: A theory of cognitive interest in science

learning. Journal of Educational Psychology, 90, 414

–434.

Harrington, R. (2002). Affective disorders. In M. Rutter & E.

Taylor (Eds.), Child and adolescent psychiatry (4th ed., pp. 463

–485). Maiden, MA: Blackwell Science.

Harris, J. J., & Ford, D. Y. (1991). Identifying and nurturing the promise of gifted Black American children. Journal of

Negro Education, 60(1), 3

–18.

Harrison, A. S., & Spuler, F. B. (1983). Hot tips for teachers. Bel-mont, CA: Fearon Teacher Aids.
Hart, B., & Risley, T. (1995). Meaningful differences in the everyday experience of young American children.

Baltimore: Paul
H. Brookes.

Hart, B., & Risley, T. (1999). The social world of children learning to talk. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes.
Hart, B., & Risley, T. R. (2003). The early catastrophe. The 30 million word gap. American Educator, 27(1), 4

–9.

Harter, S. (1974). Pleasure derived from cognitive challenge and mastery. Child Development, 45, 661

–669.

Harter, S. (1978). Effectance motivation reconsidered: Toward a developmental model. Human Development, 21,

–64.

Harter, S. (1978). Pleasure derived from challenge and the effects of receiving grades on children

‘s difﬁculty level

choices. Child Development, 49, 788

–799.

Harter, S. (1983). Developmental perspectives on the self-system. In E. M. Hetherington (Ed.), Handbook of

child psychology: Social and personality development, Vol 4 (4th ed., pp. 275

–385). New York: Wiley.

Harter, S. (1990). Self and identity development. In S. S. Feldman & G. R. Elliott (Eds.), At the threshold: The

developing adolescent. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

Harter, S. (1992). The relationship between perceived competence, affect, and motivational orientation within the

classroom: Process and patterns of change. In A. Boggiano &
T. Pittman (Eds.), Achievement and motivation: A social-developmental perspective (pp. 77

–114). Cambridge, MA:

Cambridge University Press.

Harter, S. (1999). The construction of the self: A developmental perspective. New York: Guilford Press.
Harter, S., & Jackson, B. K. (1992). Trait vs. nontrait conceptualizations of intrinsic/extrinsic motivational orientation.

Motivation and Emotion, 16, 209

–230.

Harter, S., Waters, P., & Whitesell, N. R. (1998). Relational self-worth: Differences in perceived worth as a person

across interpersonal contexts among adolescents. Child Development, 69, 756

–766.

Harter, S., Whitesell, N., & Junkin, L. (1998). Similarities and differences in domain-speci

ﬁc and global

self-evaluations of learning-disabled, behaviorally disordered, and normally achieving adolescents. American
Educational Research Journal, 35, 653

–680.

Harter, S., Whitesell, N., & Kowalski, P. (1992). Individual differences in the effects of educational transitions on

young adolescents

‘ perceptions of competence and motivational orientation. American Educational

Research Journal, 29, 777

–807.

references

601

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in601 601

10/17/08 10:05:01 AM

REFERENCES

Hartup, W. W. (1996). The company they keep: Friendships and their developmental signi

ﬁcance. Child

Development, 67, 1

–13.

Haskell, R. E. (2001). Transfer of learning: Cognition, instruction, and reasoning. San Diego, CA: Academic Press.

Haugland, S. W., & Wright, J. L. (1997). Young children and technology: A world of discovery. Boston: Allyn &

Bacon.

Hawkins, J. D., Catalano, R. F., Kosterman, R., Abbott, R., & Hill,

K. G. (1999). Preventing adolescent health-risk behaviors by strengthening protection during childhood. Archives of
Pediatric & Adolescent Medicine, 153, 226

–334.

Hayes, J. R. (1985). Three problems in teaching general skills.

In S. F. Chipman, J. W. Segal, & R. Glaser (Eds.), Thinking and learning skills: Vol. 1. Research and
open questions (pp. 391

–406). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Hayes, J. R., & Simon, H. A. (1977). Psychological differences among problem isomorphs. In N. J. Castellan, P. B.

Pisoni, &
G. R. Potts (Eds.), Cognitive theory (Vol. 2, pp. 21

–41). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Hebb, D. O. (1949). The organization of behavior: A neuro-psychological theory. Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.
Henderson, A. T., & Berla, N. (1995). A new generation of evidence: The family is critical to student achievement.

Washington, DC: Center for Law and Education.

Henderson, V., & Dweck, C. S. (1990). Achievement and motivation in adolescence: A new model and date. In S.

Feldman and G. Elliott (Eds.), At the threshold: The developing adolescent. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University
Press.

Hennessey, B. A. (1994). The consensual assessment technique:

An examination of the relationship between ratings of product and process creativity. Creativity Research
Journal, 7, 193

–208.

Henson, K. T., & Eller, B. F. (1999). Educational psychology for effective teaching. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth.

Hertel, P. T. (1994). Depression and memory: Are impairments remediable through attentional control? Current

Directions in Psychological Science, 3, 190

–193.

Hertzog, C., & Robinson, A. E. (2005). Metacognition and intelligence. In O. Wilhelm & R. W. Engle (Eds.),

Handbook of understanding and measuring intelligence (pp. 101

–123). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.

Hetherington, E. M. (1991). The role of individual differences and family relationships in children

‘s coping with

divorce and remarriage. In P. A. Cowan & M. Hetherington (Eds.), Family transitions, pp. 165

–194. Hillsdale, NJ:

Erlbaum.

Hetherington, E. M. (1993). An overview of the Virginia longitudinal study of divorce and remarriage with a focus on

early adolescence. Journal of Family Psychology, 7(1), 39

–56.

Hetherington, E. M., Bridges, M., & Insabella, G. M. (1998).

What matters? What does not? Five perspectives on the association between marital transitions and children

‘s

adjustment. American Psychologist, 53(2), 167

–184.

Hetherington, E. M., Henderson, S., & Reiss, D. (1999). Adolescent siblings in stepfamilies: Family functioning and

adolescent adjustment. Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development, Serial No. 227.

Hidalgo, N. M., Siu, S., Bright, J. A., Swap, S. M., & Epstein, J.

L. (1995). Research on families, schools, and communities: A multicultural perspective. In J. A. Banks & C. A. M.
Banks (Eds.), Handbook of research on multicultural education (pp. 631

–655). New York: Mamillan.

Hidi, S. (2000). An interest researcher

‘s perspective: The effects of intrinsic and extrinsic factors on motivation. In C.

Sansone & J. M. Harackiewicz (Eds.), Intrinsic and extrinsic motivation: The search for optimal motivation and
performance (pp. 309

–339). San Diego, CA: Academic Press.

Hidi, S. (2001). Interest, reading, and learning: Theoretical and practical considerations. Educational Psychology

Review, 13, 191

–209.

Hidi, S., & Harackiewicz, J. (2000). Motivating the academically unmotivated: A critical issue for the 21st century.

Review of Educational Research, 70, 151

–179.

Hidi, S., Weiss, J., Berndorff, D., & Nolan, J. (1998). The role of gender, instruction and a cooperative learning

technique in science education across formal and informal settings. In
L. Hoffmann, A. Krapp, K. Renninger, & J. Baumert (Eds.). Interest and learning: Proceedings of the Seeon
conference on interest and gender (pp. 215

–227). Kiel, Germany: IPN.

Hiebert, E. H. (1983). An examination of ability grouping for reading instruction. Reading Research Quarterly, 18,

231

–255.

Hill, K. T., & Wig

ﬁeld, A. (1984). Test anxiety: A major educational problem and what can be done about it.

Elementary School Journal, 85, 105

–126.

Hinshaw, S. P., & Blackman, D. R. (2005). Attention-de

ﬁcit/ hyperactivity disorder in girls. In D. J. Bell, S.

L. Foster, & E. J. Mash (Eds.), Handbook of behavioral and emotional problems in girls (pp. 117

–148). New York:

Kluwer Academic/Plenum.

Hinshaw, S. P., & Lee, S. S. (2003). Conduct and oppositional de

ﬁant disorders. In E. J. Mash & R. A. Barkley

(Eds.), Child psychopathology (2nd ed., pp. 144

–198). New York: Guilford.

Hmelo-Silver, C. E. (2004). Problem-based learning: What and how do students learn? Educational Psychology

Review, 16(3), 235

–266.

Hodge, G. K., & Nelson, N. H. (1991). Demonstrating differential reinforcement by shaping classroom participation.

Teaching of Psychology, 18, 239

–241.

Hoffman, L. W. (1974). Effects of maternal employment on the child: A review of the research. Developmental

Psychology, 10(2), 204

–228.

Hoffman, M. L. (1991). Empathy, social cognition, and moral action. In W. M. Kurtines & J. L. Gewirtz (Eds.), Moral

behavior and development: Vol. 1. Theory (pp. 275

–301). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Hoffman, M. L. (2000). Empathy and moral development: Implications for caring and justice. New York: Cambridge

University Press.

Hogan, T. P. (2007). Psychological testing: A practical introduction. Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.
Holowka, S., & Petitto, L. A. (2002). Left hemisphere cerebral specialization for babies while babbling. Science, 297,

1515.

Holyoak, K. J., & Koh, K. (1987). Surface and structural similarity in analogical transfer. Memory and Cognition, 15,

332

–340.

602

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in602 602

10/17/08 10:05:03 AM

REFERENCES

Homme, L. E., DeBaga, P. C., Devine, J. V., Steinhorst, R., & Rick-ert, E. J. (1963). Use of the Premack principle

in controlling the behavior of nursery school children. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 6, 544.

Honea, M. J. (1982). Wait time as an instructional variable:

An in

ﬂuence on teacher and student. Clearinghouse, 56(4), 167–170.

Hong, Y. Y., Chiu, C., Dweck, C. S., Lin, D., & Wan, W. (1999).

Implicit theories, attributions, and coping: A meaning system approach. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, 77, 588

–599.

Hooper, S. R., Wakely, M. B., de Kruif, R. E., & Swartz, C. W.

(2006). Aptitude-treatment interactions revisited: Effect of metacognitive intervention on subtypes of written
expression in elementary school students. Developmental Neuro-psychology, 29, 217

–241.

Hoover, J., & Oliver, R. (1996). The bullying prevention handbook: A guide for teachers, principals, and counselors.

Bloomington, IN: National Education Service.

Hoover-Dempsey, K. V., Bassler, D. C., & Brissie, J. S. (1992). Explorations in parent

–school relations. Journal of

Educational Research, 85, 287

–294.

Horgan, D. (1978). The development of the full passive. Journal of Child Language, 5, 65

–80.

Horn, J. L. (1994). Theory of

ﬂuid and crystallized intelligence. In

R. J. Sternberg (Ed.), The encyclopedia of human intelligence (Vol. 1, pp. 443

–451). New York: Macmillan.

Horner, S. L. (2004). Observational learning during shared book reading: The effects on preschoolers

‘ attention to

print and letter knowledge. Reading Psychology, 25, 167

–188.

Houtz, J. C., & Krug, D. (1995). Assessment of creativity: Resolving a mid-life crisis. Educational Psychological

Review, 7, 269

–300.

Howard, E. R., Sugarman, J., & Christian, D. (2003). Trends in two-way immersion education: A review of

the research. Washington, DC: Center for Applied Linguistics.

Howard, G. R. (1999). We can

’t teach what we don’t know:

White teachers, multiracial schools. New York: Teachers College Press.

Howard, V. F., Williams, B. F., Port, P. D., & Lepper, C. (2001).

Very young children with special needs (2nd ed.). Columbus, OH: Merrill.

Howes, C., Phillipsen, L., & Peisner-Feinberg, E. (2000). The consistency of perceived teacher

–child relationships

between preschool and kindergarten. Journal of School Psychology, 38, 113

–132.

Howlin, P., Mawhood, L., & Rutter, M. (2000). Autism and developmental receptive language

disorder

—A follow-up comparison in early adult life: II. Social, behavioral, and psychiatric outcomes. Journal of

Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 41, 561

–578.

Hubbard, J. A., & Coie, J. D. (1994). Emotional correlates of social competence in children

‘s

peer relationships. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 40, 1

–20.

Hubel, D. H., & Weisel, T. N. (1962). Receptive

ﬁelds, binocular transaction, and functional architecture in the cat‘s

visual cortex. Journal of Physiology, 160, 106

–154.

Huff, J. A. (1988). Personalized behavior modi

ﬁcation: An in-school suspension program that teaches

students how to change. School Counselor, 35, 210

–214.

Hughes, B., Sullivan, H., & Mosley, M. (1985). External evaluation, task dif

ﬁculty, and continuing motivation.

Journal of Educational Research, 78, 210

–215.

Hulit, L. M., & Howard, M. R. (2006). Born to talk: An introduction to speech and language development. Boston:

Pearson.

Hunsaker, S. L., & Callahan, C. (1995). Creativity and giftedness:

Published instrument uses and abuses. Gifted Child Quarterly, 39, 110

–114.

Huppert, J., Lomask, S. M., & Lazarowitz, R. (2002). Computer simulations in the high school: Students

‘ cognitive

stages, science process skills, and academic achievement in micro-biology. International Journal of Science
Education, 24(8). 803

–821.

Hussong, A. M. (2002). Differentiating peer contexts and risk for adolescent substance abuse. Journal of Youth and

Adolescence, 31(3), 207

–220.

Huston, A. C., & Alvarez, M. M. (1990). The socialization context of gender role development in early

adolescence. In
R. Montemayor, G. R. Adams, & T. P. Gullotta (Eds.), From childhood to adolescence: A transitional period? (pp.
156

–179). Newbury Park, CA: Sage.

Hyatt, K. J. (2007). Brain Gym: Building stronger brains or wishful thinking? Remedial and Special Education, 28(2),

117

–124.

Hyde, J. S., & Durik, A. M. (2005). Gender, competence, and motivation. In A. J. Elliot & C. S. Dweck (Eds.),

Handbook of competence and motivation (pp. 375

–391). New York: Guilford.

Hyde, J. S., Fennema, E., & Lamon, S. J. (1990). Gender differences in mathematics performance: A

meta-analysis. Psychological Bulletin, 107(2), 139

–155.

Hynd, C., Holschuh, J., & Nist, S. (2000). Learning complex science information: Motivation theory and its relation

to student perceptions. Reading and Writing Quarterly, 16, 23

–58.

Inhelder, B., & Piaget, J. (1955). The growth of logical thinking from childhood to adolescence. Paris: Presses

Universitaires de France.

Inhelder, B., Sinclair, H., & Bovet, M. (1974). Learning and the development of cognition. Cambridge, MA: Harvard

University Press.

INTASC. (1992). Model Standards for Beginning Teaching Licensing, Assessment, and Development: A

Resource for State Dialogue. Available at http://www.ccsso.org/contents/pdfs/ corestrd.pdf.

Irvine, J. J. (1990). Black students and school failure: Policies, practices, and prescriptions. New York: Greenwood

Press.

Israel, E. (2001). Best-ever back to school activities: 50 winning and welcoming activities, strategies, and tips that

save you time and get your school year off to a sensational start. Jefferson City, MO: Scholastic.

references

603

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in603 603

10/17/08 10:05:05 AM

REFERENCES

Izard, C. E. (2001). Emotional intelligence or adaptive emotions?

Emotion, 1, 249

–257.

Jackson, P. W., Boostrom, R. E., & Hansen, D. T. (1993). The moral life of schools. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.

Jacobs, G. M. (2004). A classroom investigation of the growth of metacognitive awareness in kindergarten children

through the writing process. Early Childhood Education Journal, 32, 17

–23.

Jacobs, J. E. (1991). In

ﬂuence of gender stereotypes on parent and child mathematics ability. Journal of Educational

Psychology, 83, 518

–527.

Jacobs, J., & Eccles, J. (1992). The impact of mothers

‘ gender-role stereotypic beliefs on mothers‘ and

children

‘s ability perceptions. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 63, 932–944.

Jacobs, J. E., & Eccles, J. S. (2000). Parents, task values, and real-life achievement-related choices. In C. Sansone

& J. M. Harackiewicz (Eds.), Intrinsic and extrinsic motivation: The search for optimal motivation and performance.
San Diego, CA: Academic Press.

Jacobs, J. E., Lanza, S., Osgood, D. W., Eccles, J. S., & Wig

ﬁeld,

A. (2002). Changes in children

‘s self-competence and values: Gender and domain differences across grades one

through twelve. Child Development, 73, 509

–527.

Jaffari-Bimmel, N., Juffer, F., van Ijzendoorn, M. H., Baker-mans-Kranenburg, M. J., & Mooijaart, A.

(2006). Social development from infancy to adolescence: Longitudinal and concurrent factors in an
adoption sample. Developmental Psychology, 42, 1143

–1153.

Jagacinski, C. M., & Nicholls, J. G. (1984). Conceptions of ability and related affects in task involvement and ego

involvement. Journal of Educational Psychology, 76, 909

–919.

Jagacinski, C. M., & Nicholls, J. G. (1987). Competence and affect in task involvement and ego involvement: The

impact of social comparison information. Journal of Educational Psychology, 79, 107

–114.

Jalava, A. (1988). Mother tongue and identity: Nobody could see that I was a Finn. In T. Skutnabb-Kangas & J.

Cummins (Eds.), Minority education: From shame to struggle (pp. 161

–166). Bristol, PA: Multilingual

Matters.

James, S. (1990). Normal language acquisition. Austin, TX:

PRO-ED.

Jarvin, L., & Sternberg, R. J. (2003). Alfred Binet

‘s contributions to educational psychology. In B. J. Zimmerman &

D. L. Schunk (Eds.), Educational psychology: A century of contributions (pp. 65

–79). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Jarvis, H. I., & Gathercole, S. E. (2003). Verbal and non-verbal working memory and achievements on national

curriculum tests at 11 and 14 years. Educational Child Psychology, 20, 123

–140.

Jensen, E. (1998). Teaching with the brain in mind. Alexandria,

VA: ASCD Press.

Jensen, E. (2000). Brain-based learning. San Diego, CA: The

Brain Store.

Jensen, M. M. (2005). Introduction to emotional and behavioral disorders: Recognizing and managing problems in

the classroom. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Merrill/Prentice Hall.

Jensen, P. S., Hinshaw, S. P., Kraemer, H. C., Lenora, N., Newcorn,

J. H., Abikoff, H. B., et al. (2001). ADHD comorbidity

ﬁndings from the MTA study: Comparing comorbid

subgroups. Journal of the American Academy of Child Adolescent Psychiatry, 40(2), 147

–158.

Jeynes, W. H. (1999). Effects of remarriage following divorce on the academic achievement of children. Journal of

Youth and Adolescence, 28, 385

–393.

Jeynes, W. H. (2000). A longitudinal analysis on the effects of remarriage following divorce on the academic

achievement of adolescents. Journal of Divorce and Remarriage, 33(1/2), 131

–148.

Jiang, Z., & Potter, W. D. (1994). A computer microworld to introduce students to probability. Journal of Computers

in Mathematics and Science Teaching, 13(2), 197

–222.

Johnson, A. P. (2000). Up and out: Creative and critical thinking skills to enhance learning. Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

Johnson, C. J., & Anglin, J. M. (1995). Qualitative developments in the content and form of children

‘s deﬁnitions.

Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, 38(3), 612

–629.

Johnson, D. W., & Johnson, R. (1975). Learning together and alone: Cooperation, competition, and

individualilzation. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Johnson, D. W., & Johnson, R. (1978). Cooperative, competitive, and individualistic learning. Journal of Research

and Development in Education, 12, 3

–15.

Johnson, D. W., & Johnson, R. (1985). Mainstreaming hearing-impaired students: The effects of effort in

communicating on cooperation. Journal of Psychology, 119, 31

–44.

Johnson, D. W., & Johnson, R. T. (1985). Motivational processes in cooperative, competitive, and

individualistic learning situations. In C. Ames & R. Ames (Eds.), Attitudes and attitude change in special education:
Its theory and practice (pp. 118

–142). New York: Academic Press.

Johnson, D. W., & Johnson, R. T. (1986). Mainstreaming and cooperative learning strategies. Exceptional Children,

52(6), 553

–561.

Johnson, D. W., & Johnson, R. T. (1990). Cooperative learning and achievement. In S. Sharan (Ed.),

Cooperative learning: Theory and research (pp. 23

–37). New York: Praeger.

Johnson, D. W., & Johnson, R. T. (1998). Cooperative learning and social interdependence theory. In R. S. Tindale,

L. Heath,
J. Edwards, E. J. Posavac, F. B. Bryant, et al. (Eds.), Theory and research on small groups (pp. 9

–35). New York:

Plenum Press.

Johnson, D. W., & Johnson, R. T. (1999). Learning together and alone: Cooperative, competitive, and individualistic

learning. Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

Johnson, D. W., & Johnson, R. T. (2002). Meaningful assessment: A meaningful and cooperative

process. Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

Johnson, D. W., & Johnson, R. T. (2005). Cooperative learning.

In S. W. Lee (Ed.), Encyclopedia of school psychology. Thou-sand Oaks, CA: Sage.

604

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in604 604

10/17/08 10:05:07 AM

REFERENCES

Johnson, D., Maruyama, G., Johnson, R., Nelson, D., & Skon, L.

(1981). Effects of cooperative, competitive, and individualistic goal structures on achievement. Psychological
Bulletin, 89(1), 47

–62.

Johnson, D., Skon, L., & Johnson, R. (1980). Effects of cooperative, competitive, and individualistic conditions on

children

‘s problem-solving performance. American Educational Research Journal, 17(1), 83–93.

Johnson, J., & Newport, E. (1989). Critical period effects in sound language learning: The in

ﬂuence of

maturation state on the acquisition of English as a second language. Cognitive Psychologist, 21, 60

–99.

Johnson, J., & Newport, E. (1991). Critical period effects on universal properties of language: The status of

subjacency in the acquisition of a second langauge. Cognition, 39, 215

–258.

Jones, E. D., & Southern, W. T. (1991). Conclusions about acceleration: Echoes of a debate. In W. Southern & E.

Jones (Eds.), The academic acceleration of gifted students (pp. 223

–228). New York: Teachers College Press.

Jones, R. W. (1994). Performance and alternative assessment techniques: Meeting the challenges of

alternative evaluation strategies. Paper presented at the Second International Conference on Educational
Evaluation and Assessment, Pretoria, Republic of South Africa.

Jones, V. F., & Jones, L. S. (2001). Comprehensive classroom management: Creating communities of

support and solving problems (6th ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

Jordan, N. C. (1995). Clinical assessment of early mathematics disabilities: Adding up the research

ﬁndings.

Learning Disabilities Research & Practice, 10(1), 59

–69.

Jordan, N. C., Hanich, L., & Kaplan, D. (2003). A longitudinal study of mathematical competencies in children with

speci

ﬁc mathematics difﬁculties versus children with comorbid mathematics and reading difﬁculties. Child

Development, 74, 834

–850.

Jordan, N. C., & Montani, T. O. (1997). Cognitive arithmetic and problem solving: A comparison of children with

speci

ﬁc and general mathematics difﬁculties. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 30(6), 624–634.

Jorgensen, G. (2006). Kohlberg and Gilligan: Duet or duel? Journal of Moral Education, 35, 179

–196.

Joshi, M. S., & Maclean, M. (1994). Indian and English children

‘s understanding of the distinction between real and

apparent emotion. Child Development, 65, 1372

–1384.

Josselson, R. (1988). The embedded self: I and thou revisited. In

D. K. Lapsley & E. C. Power (Eds.), Self, ego, and identity: Integrative approaches. New York: Springer.

Joyce, B., Weil, M., & Calhoun, E. (2004). Models of teaching

(7th ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

Juel, C. (1988). Learning to read and write: A longitudinal study of

ﬁfty-four children from ﬁrst through fourth grades.

Journal of Educational Psychology, 80, 437

–447.

Juvonen, J. (2007). Reforming middle schools: Focus on continuity, social connectedness, and engagement.

Educational Psychologist, 42(4), 197

–208.

Kagan, J., Arcus, D., Snidman, N., Wang, Y. F., Hendler, J., &

Greene, S. (1994). Ease of arousal in infants: A cross-national comparison. Developmental Psychology, 30, pp.
342

–345.

Kagan, J., Snidman, N., & Arcus, D. (1998). Childhood derivatives of reactivity in infancy. Child Development, 69,

1483

–1493.

Kameenui, E. J., & Darch, C. B. (1995). Instructional classroom management: A proactive approach to

behavior management. White Plains, New York: Longman.

Kane, T. J., & Staiger, D. O. (2002). Volatility in school test scores: Implications for test-based

accountability systems. In
D. Ravitch (Ed.), Brookings papers on education policy, 2002 (pp. 235

–283). Washington, DC: Brookings Institution

Press.

Kane, T. J., & Staiger, D. O. (2003). Unintended consequences of racial subgroup rules. In P. E. Peterson & M. R.

West (Eds.), No child left behind? The politics and practice of school accountability (pp. 152

–176). Washington,

DC: Brookings Institution Press.

Kaplan, A., & Midgley, C. (2000). The relationship between perceptions of the classroom goals structure and early

adolescents

‘ affect in school: The mediating role of coping strategies. Learning and Individual Differences, 11,

187

–202.

Kaplan, R. M., & Saccuzzo, D. P. (2005). Psychological testing:

Principles, applications, and issues (6th ed.). Belmont, CA: Thomson/Wadsworth.

Karpov, Y. V., & Bransford, J. D. (1995). L. S. Vygotsky and the doctrine of empirical and theoretical learning.

Educational Psychologist, 30(2), 61

–66.

Karrass, J., Braungart-Rieker, J., Mullins, J., & Lefever, J. (2002).

Processes in language acquisition: The roles of gender, attention, and maternal encouragement of attention over
time. Journal of Child Language, 29, 519

–543.

Karweit, N. (1989). Time and learning: A review. In R. E. Slavin

(Ed.), School and classroom organization (pp. 69

–95). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Kast, A., & Connor, K. (1988). Sex and age differences in response to informational and controlling feedback.

Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 14, 514

–523.

Katz, P. A. (2003). Racists or tolerant multiculturalists? How do they begin? American Psychologist, 58, 897

–909.

Katzir, T., & Pare-Blagoev, J. (2006). Applying cognitive neuro-science research to education: The case of literacy.

Educational Psychologist, 41(1), 53

–74.

Kauffman, J. M. (2001). Characteristics of emotional and behavioral disorders of children and youth (7th ed.).

Columbus, OH: Merrill.

Kaufman, A., & Kaufman, N. (2004). KTEA-II comprehensive interpretation manual. Circle Pines, MN: American

Guidance Service.

Kaufmann, D., Gesten, E., Santa Lucia, R. C., Salcedo, O.,

Rendina-Gobioff, G., & Gadd, R. (2000). The relationship between parenting style and children

‘s

adjustment: The parents

‘ perspective. Journal of Child and Family Studies, 9(2), 231–245.

Kazdin, A. E. (2001). Behavior modi

ﬁcation in applied settings

(6th ed.). Belmont, CA: Wadsworth.

references

605

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in605 605

10/17/08 10:05:09 AM

REFERENCES

Kellough, R. D. (2005). Your

ﬁrst year of teaching: Guidelines for success. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson.

Kelly, P. R. (1997/1998). Transfer of learning from a computer simulation as compared to a laboratory activity.

Journal of Educational Technology Systems, 26(4), 345

–351.

Kemler, D. G. (1978). Patterns of hypothesis testing in children

‘s discriminative learning: A study of the

development of problem-solving strategies. Developmental Psychology, 14, 653

–673.

Kemple, K. M. (1991). Research in review: Preschool children

‘s acceptance and social interaction. Young Children,

46, 47

–54.

Kent, R. D., & Miulo, G. (1995). Phonetic abilities in the

ﬁrst year of life. In P. Fletcher & B. MacWhinney (Eds.), The

handbook of child language (pp.303

–334). Cambridge, MA: Blackwell.

Keogh, B. K. (2003). Temperament in the classroom. Baltimore:

Brookes.

Kerr, M. M., & Nelson, C. M. (1998). Strategies for managing problem behaviors in the classroom (2nd ed.).

Columbus, OH: Merrill.

Khattri, N., Reeve, A. L., & Adamson, R. J. (1997). Assessment of student performance: Studies of education

reform. Washington, DC: Pelavin Research Institute.

Kierstad, J. (1985). Direct instruction and experiential approaches: Are they really mutually

exclusive? Educational Leadership, 42(8), 25

–30.

Kiewra, K. A. (1985). Investigating notetaking and review: A depth of processing alternative. Educational

Psychologist, 20, 23

–32.

Kiewra, K. A. (2002). How classroom teachers can help students learn and teach them how to learn. Theory into

Practice, 41, 71

–80.

Kiewra, K. A., DuBois, N. F., Christian, D., McShane, A., Meyer-hoffer, M., & Roskelley, D. (1991). Note-taking

functions and techniques. Journal of Educational Psychology, 83, 240

–245.

Kim, J. S., & Sunderman, G. L. (2005). Measuring academic pro

ﬁciency under the No Child Left Behind Act:

Implications for educational equity. Educational Researcher, 34(8), 3

–13.

Kimble, G. A. (2000). Behaviorism and unity in psychology. Current Directions in Psychological Science, 9, 208

–212.

King, A. (1990). Enhancing peer interaction and learning in the classroom. American Educational

Research Journal, 27, 664

–687.

King, A. (1991). Effects of training in strategic questioning on children

‘s problem-solving performance. Journal of

Educational Psychology, 83(3), 307

–317.

King, A. (2002). Structuring peer interaction to promote high-level cognitive processing. Theory into Practice, 41(1),

–39.

King, P. M., & Kitchener, K. S. (1995). Developing re

ﬂective judgment. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.

Kirk, S. A., Gallagher, J. J., Anastasiow, N. J., & Coleman, M. R.

(2006). Educating exceptional children (11th ed.). Boston: Houghton Mif

ﬂin.

King, P. M., & Kitchener, K. S. (2002). The re

ﬂective judgment model: Twenty years of research on

epistemic cognition. In B. K. Hofer & P. R. Pintrich (Eds.), Personal epistemology:
The psychology of beliefs about knowledge and knowing (pp. 37

–61). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Klausmeir, H. J. (1992). Concept learning and concept teaching.

Educational Psychologist, 27, 267

–286.

Klausmeir, H. J. (2004). Conceptual learning and development. In W. E. Craighead & C. B. Nemeroff

(Eds.), The concise Corsini encyclopedia of psychology and behavioral sciences (pp. 209

–210). New York:

Wiley.

Klein, M. D., Cook, R. E., & Richardson-Gibbs, A. M. (2001).

Strategies for including children with special needs in early childhood settings. Albany, NY: Delmar.

Kling, K. C., Hyde, J. S., Showers, C. J., & Buswell, B. N. (1999).

Gender differences in self-esteem: A meta-analysis. Psychological Bulletin, 125, 470

–500.

Knotek, S. (2005). Portfolio assessment. In S. W. Lee (Ed.), Encyclopedia of school psychology. Thousand Oaks,

CA: Sage.

Knudsen, E. I. (1999). Early experience and critical periods. In M.

J. Zigmond (Ed.), Fundamental neuroscience (pp. 637

–654). San Diego, CA: Academic Press.

Kochanska, G., Gross, J. N., Lin, M.-H., & Nichols, K. E. (2002).

Guilt in young children: Development, determinants, and relations with a broader system of standards.
Child Development, 73, 461

–482.

Koegel, L. K., Koegel, R. L., & Dunlap, G. (1996). Positive behavior support: Including people with dif

ﬁcult behavior

in the community. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes.

Koegel, L. K., Koegel, R. L., Harrower, J. K., & Carter, C. M. (1999).

Pivotal response I: Overview of approach. Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 24,
174

–185.

Koestner, R., Ryan, R. M., Bernieri, F., & Holt, K. (1984). Setting limits on children

‘s behavior: The differential

effects of controlling versus informational styles on intrinsic motivation and creativity. Journal of Personality, 52,
233

–248.

Koestner, R., Zuckerman, M., & Koestner, J. (1987). Praise, involvement, and intrinsic motivation. Journal of

Personality and Social Psychology, 53, 383

–390.

Kogan, E. (2001). Gifted bilingual students. New York: Peter

Lang.

Kohlberg, L. (1963). The development of children

‘s orientations toward moral order: Sequence in the development of

moral thought. Vita Humans, 6, 11

–33.

Kohlberg, L. (1975). The cognitive-developmental approach to moral education. Phi Delta Kappan, 57, 670

–677.

Kohlberg, L. (1981). Essays in moral development: The philosophy of moral development (Vol. 1). San Francisco:

Harper & Row.

Kohlberg, L. (1984). Essays in moral development (Vol. 2). New

York: Harper & Row.

Kohlberg, L. (1984). The psychology of moral development: The nature and validity of moral stages. San Francisco:

Harper & Row.

Kohlberg, L., Yaeger, J., & Hjertholm, E. (1968). Private speech:

Four studies and a review of theories. Child Development, 39, 691

–736.

Kohler, F. W., Anthony, L. J., Steighner, S. A., & Hoyson, M.

(2001). Teaching social interaction skills in the integrated pre-

606

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in606 606

10/17/08 10:05:11 AM

REFERENCES

school: An examination of naturalistic tactics. Topics in Early Childhood Special Education, 21(2), 93

–113.

Kohn, A. (1996). Beyond discipline: From compliance to community. Alexandria, VA: Association for Supervision and

Curriculum Development.

Korenman, S., Miller, J., & Sjaastad, J. (1995). Long-term poverty and child development in the United States:

Results from the NLSY. Children and Youth Services Review, 17, 127

–155.

Koretz, D., Barron, S., Mitchell, K., & Keith, S. (1996). Perceived effects of the Maryland school performance

assessment program (CSE Technical Report 409). Los Angeles: National Center for Research on
Evaluation, Standards, and Student Testing.

Kornell, N., & Metcalfe, J. (2006). Study ef

ﬁcacy and the region of proximal learning framework. Journal of

Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory, and Cognition, 32, 609

–622.

Kornhaber, M., Fierros, E., & Veenema, S. (2004). Multiple intelligences: Best ideas from research and practice.

Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

Kosslyn, S. M., & Koening, O. (1992). Wet mind: The new cognitive neuroscience. New York: Free Press.

Kostelnik, M., Soderman, A., & Whiren, A. (2004). Developmentally appropriate curriculum: Best practices in early

childhood education. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Merrill/Prentice Hall.

Kounin, J. S. (1970). Discipline and group management in classrooms. New York: Holt, Rinehart, & Winston.
Kourilsky, M. L., & Wittrock, M. C. (1992). Generative teaching:

An enhancement strategy for the learning of economics in cooperative groups. American Educational Research
Journal, 29(4), 861

–876.

Koustaal, W., & Cavendish, M. (2006). Using what we know:

Consequences of intentionally retrieving gist versus item-speci

ﬁc information. Journal of Experimental

Psychology: Learning, Memory, and Cognition, 32(4), 778

–791.

Kramarski, B., & Mevarech, Z. R. (2003). Enhancing mathematical reasoning in the classroom: The effects of

cooperative learning and metacognitive training. American Educational Research Journal, 40, 281

–310.

Krapp, A. (1999). Interest, motivation and learning: An educational

–psychological perspective. European Journal

of Psychology of Education, 14, 23

–40.

Kreitzer, A. E., Madaus, G. F., & Haney, W. (1989). Competency testing and dropouts. In L. Weis, E. Farrar, & H. G.

Petrie (Eds.) Dropouts from school: Issues, dilemmas, and solutions (pp. 129

–152). Albany, NY: State University of

New York Press.

Krohne, H. (1992). Developmental conditions of anxiety and coping: A two-process model of child-rearing

effects. In
K. Hagtvet & T. Johnson (Eds.), Advances in test anxiety and research, Vol. 7 (pp. 143

–155). Amsterdam: Swets &

Zeitlinger.

Krumboltz, J. D., & Krumboltz, H. B. (1972). Changing children

’s behaviors. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Krumboltz, J. D., & Yeh, C. J. (1996). Competitive grading sabotages good teaching. Phi Delta Kappan, 78,

324

–326.

Kryspin, W. J., & Feldhusen, J. F. (1974). Developing classroom tests. Edina, MN: Burgess.

Kubiszyn, T., & Borich, G. (2003). Educational testing and measurement: Classroom application and practice (7th

ed.). New York: Wiley.

Kuhl, P. K. (2004). Early language acquisition: Cracking the speech code. Neuroscience, 5, 831

–843.

Kuhura-Kojima, K., & Hatano, G. (1989). Strategies of recognizing sentences among high and low critical thinkers.

Japanese Psychological Research 3(1), 1

–9.

Kuhura-Kojima, K., & Hatano, G. (1991). Contribution of content knowledge and learning ability to the learning of

facts. Journal of Educational Psychology, 83(2), 253

–263.

Kulhavy, R. W., Lee, J. B., & Caterino, L. C. (1985). Conjoint retention of maps and related discourse.

Contemporary Educational Psychology, 10, 28

–37.

Kulieke, M., Bakker, J., Collins, C., Fennimore, T., Fine, C., Herman, J., Jones, B. F., Raack, L., & Tinzmann, M.

B. (1990). Why should assessment be based on a vision of learning? Oak Brook, IL: North Central Regional
Educational Laboratory.

Kulik, C. C., Kulik, J. A., & Bangert-Drowns, R. L. (1990). Effectiveness of mastery learning programs: A meta-

analysis. Review of Educational Research, 60, 265

–299.

Kulik, J. A. (1992). An analysis of the research on ability grouping: Historical and contemporary perspectives. Storrs,

CT: National Research Center on the Gifted and Talented, University of Connecticut.

Kulik, J., & Kulik, C. (1987). Effects of ability grouping on student achievement. Equity and Excellence, 23(1

–2),

–30.

Kulik, J. A., & Kulik, C. C. (1984). Effects of accelerated instruction on students. Review of Educational

Research, 54(3), 409

–425.

Kulik, J. A., & Kulik, C. C. (1988). Timing of feedback and verbal learning. Review of Educational Research, 58,

–97.

Kulik, J. A., & Kulik, C. C. (1990). Ability grouping and gifted students. In N. Colangelo & G. A. Davis (Eds.),

Handbook of gifted education (pp. 178

–196). Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

Kulik, J. A., & Kulik, C. C. (1992). Meta-analytic

ﬁndings on grouping programs. Gifted Child Quarterly,

36(2), 73

–77.

Kulik, J. A., & Kulik, C. C. (2004). Meta-analytic

ﬁndings on grouping programs. In L. E. Brody (Ed.), Grouping and

acceleration practices in gifted education (pp. 105

–114). Thousand Oaks, CA: Corwin Press.

Kurdek, L. A., & Sinclair, R. J. (1988). Relation of eighth graders

‘ family structure, gender, and family environment

with academic performance and school behavior. Journal of Educational Psychology, 80(1), 90

–94.

Kusche, C. A., & Greenberg, M. T. (2001). PATHS in your classroom: Promoting emotional literacy and

alleviating emotional distress. In J. Cohen (Ed.), Social emotional learning and the elementary school child:
A guide for educators (pp. 140

–161). New York: Teachers College Press.

LaFontana, K. M., & Cillessen, A. H. N. (2002). Children

‘s perceptions of popular and unpopular peers: A

multi-method assessment. Developmental Psychology, 38, 635

–647.

references

607

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in607 607

10/17/08 10:05:13 AM

REFERENCES

La Freniere, P., & Sroufe, L. A. (1985). Pro

ﬁles of peer competence in the preschool interrelations between

measures, in

ﬂuence of social ecology, and relation to attachment history. Developmental Psychology, 21, 56–69.

Lam, L. T., & Kirby, S. L. (2002). Is emotional intelligence an advantage? An exploration of the impact of emotional

and general intelligence on individual performance. Journal of Social Psychology, 142(1), 133

–143.

Lambert, N. M., & McCombs, B. L. (1998). How students learn:

Reforming schools through learner-centered education. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.

Landrum, T. J., & Kaufman, J. M. (2006). Behavioral approaches to classroom management. In C. M. Evertson &

C. S. Weinstein (Eds.), Handbook of classroom management: Research, practice and contemporary issues (pp.
47

–71). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Lane, K. L., Gresham, F. M., & O

’Shaughnessy, T. E. (2002). Interventions for children with or at risk for emotional

and behavioral disorders. Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon.

Langer, E. J. (1993). A mindful education. Educational Psychologist, 28(1), 43

–50.

Langer, J. A. (2000). Excellence in English in middle and high school: How teachers

‘ professional lives

support student achievement. American Educational Research Journal, 37, 397

–439.

Langley, A. K., Bergman, R. L., McCracken, J., & Piacentini, J. C.

(2004). Impairment in childhood anxiety disorders: Preliminary examination of the Child Anxiety Impact
Scale

–Parent Version. Journal of Child and Adolescent Psychopharmacology, 14, 105–114.

Lapsley, D. K. (1993). Toward an integrated theory of adolescent ego development: The

―new look‖ at adolescent

egocentrism. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 63, 562

–571.

Lapsley, D. K. (2006). Moral stage theory. In M. Killen & J. Smetana (Eds.), Handbook of moral development.

Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Larkin, J. H. (1989). What kind of knowledge transfers? In L. B.

Resnick (Ed.), Knowing, learning, and instruction (pp. 283

–305). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Laurendeau-Bendavid, M. (1977). Culture, schooling, and cognitive development: A comparative study of children in

French Canada and Rwanda. In P. R. Dasen (Ed.), Piagetian psychology: Cross-cultural contributions (pp.
123

–168). New York: Gardner Press.

Lave, J. (1988). Cognition in practice. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge

University Press.

Lave, J., & Wenger, E. (1991). Situated teaming: Legitimate peripheral participation. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge

University Press.

Law, D. J., Pellegrino, J. W., & Hunt, E. B. (1993). Comparing the tortoise and the hare: Gender differences

and experience in dynamic spatial reasoning tasks. Psychological Science, 4, 35

–40.

Lawton, J. T., & Hooper, F. H. (1978). Piagetian theory and early childhood education: A critical analysis. In L. S.

Siegel and
C. J. Brainerd (Eds.), Alternatives to Piaget: Critical essays on the theory (pp. 169

–199). New York: Academic

Press.

Lay, R., & Wakstein, J. (1985). Race, academic achievement, and self-concept of ability. Research in

Higher Education, 22, 43

–64.

Lazar, I., & Darlington, R. (1982). Lasting effects of early education: A report from the consortium for longitudinal

studies. Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development, 47(2

–3) (Serial No. 195).

Leach, D. J., and Byrne, M. K. (1986). Some

―Spill-over‖ Effects of a home-based reinforcement programme in a

secondary School. Educational Psychology, 6(3), 265

–276.

Leahey, E., & Guo, G. (2001). Gender differences in mathematical trajectories. Social Forces, 80(2), 713

–732.

Leap, W. L. (1981). American Indian language maintenance. Annual Review of Anthropology, 10, 209

–236.

LeBlanc, R. S., Muise, J. G., & Blanchard, L. (1992). Backward masking in children and adolescents: Sensory

transmission, accrual rate, and asymptotic performance. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 53, 105

–114.

Lederer, J. M. (2000). Reciprocal teaching of social studies in inclusive elementary classrooms. Journal of Learning

Disabilities, 33(1), 91

–106.

LeDoux, J. E. (2000). Emotional circuits in the brain. Annual Review of Neuroscience, 23, 155

–184.

Lee, S.-H., Simpson, R. L., & Shogren, K. A. (2007). Effects and implications of self-management for students with

autism: A meta-analysis. Focus on Autism and Other Developmental Disabilities, 22(1), 2

–13.

Lefebvre, L. (2006). Social intelligence and forebrain size in birds. In J. Kaas (Ed.) The evolution of

nervous systems (Vol. 2, pp 229

–236). Oxford: Elsevier.

Leinhardt, G., Weidman, C., & Hammond, K. M. (1987). Introduction and integration of classroom routines

by expert teachers. Curriculum Inquiry, 17(2), 135

–175.

Lemerise, E. A., & Arsenio, W. F. (2004). An integrated model of emotion processes and cognition in social

information processing. Child Development, 71(1), 107

–118.

Lentz, F. E. (1988). Reductive Procedures. In J. C. Witt, S. N. Elliott, & F. M. Gresham (Eds.), Handbook of Behavior

Therapy in Education. New York: Plenum Press.

Leontiev, A. N. (1961). Learning as a problem in psychology. In

N. O

‘Connor (Ed.), Recent Soviet psychology (pp. 227–246). Nw York: Liveright.

Leontiev, A. N., & Luria, A. R. (1972). Some notes concerning

Dr. Fodor

‘s ―Reﬂections on L. S. Vygotsky‘s thought and language.‖ Cognition, 1, 311–316.

Lepper, M. R., Corpus, J. H., & Iyengar, S. S. (2005). Intrinsic and extrinsic motivational orientations in the

classroom: Age differences and academic correlates. Journal of Educational Psychology, 97(2), 184

–196.

Lepper, M. R., & Greene, D. (1978). The hidden costs of reward.

Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Lepper, M. R., & Hodell, M. (1989). Intrinsic motivation in the classroom. In C. Ames & R. Ames (Eds.), Research on

motivation in education (Vol. 3, pp. 73

–105). San Diego, CA: Academic Press.

608

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in608 608

10/17/08 10:05:15 AM

REFERENCES

Lepper, M. R., & Malone, T. W. (1987). Intrinsic motivation and instructional effectiveness in computer-based

education. In
R. E. Snow & M. J. Fair (Eds.), Cognitive and affective process analyses (Vol. 3, pp. 255

–286). Mahwah, NJ:

Erlbaum.

Lepper, M. R., Sethi, S., Dialdin, D., & Drake, M. (1997). Intrinsic and extrinsic motivation: A developmental

perspective. In S.
S. Luthar, J. A. Burack, D. Cicchetti, & J. R. Weisz (Eds.), Developmental psychopathology: Perspectives on
adjustment, risk, and disorder (pp. 23

–50). New York: Cambridge University Press.

Lerman, D. C., & Iwata, B. A. (1995). Prevalence of the extinction burst and its attenuation during treatment. Journal

of Applied Behavior Analysis, 28, 93

–94.

Lesgold, A. M. (1988). Problem solving. In R. J. Sternberg & E. E.

Smith (Eds.), The psychology of human thoughts. New York: Cambridge University Press.

Lessow-Hurley, J. (2000). The foundations of dual language instruction (3rd ed.). White Plains, NY: Longman.

Leu, D., & Kinzer, C. (1995). Effective reading instruction. Engle-wood Cliffs, NJ: Merrill/Prentice Hall.
Levesque, C., Zuehike, A. N., Stanek, L. R., & Ryan, R. M. (2004).

Autonomy and competence in German and American university students: A comparative study based on
self-determination theory. Journal of Educational Psychology, 96, 68

–84.

Levin, J., & Nolan, J. F. (2000). Principles of classroom management (3rd ed). Boston: Allyn & Bacon.
Lewinsohn, P. M., & Essau, C. A. (2002). Depression in adolescents. In C. L. Hammen & I. H. Gotlib (Eds.),

Handbook of depression (pp. 541

–559). New York: Guilford.

Lewis, A., & Smith, D. (1993). De

ﬁning higher order thinking.

Theory into Practice, 32(3), 131

–137.

Liberman, I. Y., Shankweiler, D., & Liberman, A. M. (1989). The alphabetic principle and learning to read. In D.

Shankweiler, & I. Y. Liberman, (Eds.), Phonology and reading disability: Solving the reading puzzle (pp.
1

–33). Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press.

Lichtenstein, E. H., & Brewer, W. F. (1980). Memory for goal-directed events. Cognitive Psychology, 12, 415

–445.

Lindholm-Leary, K. J. (2001). Dual language education. Avon,

UK: Multilingual Matters.

Lindholm-Leary, K. J. (2004

–2005). The rich promise of twoway immersion. Educational Leadership, 62(4), 56–59.

Lindner, E. G. (2006). Emotion and con

ﬂict: Why it is important to understand how emotions affect conﬂict and how

con

ﬂict affects emotions. In M Deutsch, P. T. Coleman, & E. C. Markus (Eds.), The handbook of conﬂict resolution:

Theory and practice (pp. 268

–293). San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.

Lindsay, G., Dockrell, J., Letchford, B., & Mackie, C. (2002). Self-esteem of children with speci

ﬁc speech and

language dif

ﬁculties. Child Language Teaching and Therapy, 18, 125–143.

Lindvall, C. M., & Nitko, A. J. (1975). Measuring pupil achievement and aptitude (2nd ed.). New York: Harcourt

Brace Jovanovich.

Linn, M. C., & Peterson, A. C. (1985). Emergence and characterization of sex differences in spatial ability: A

meta-analysis. Child Development, 56, 1479

–1498.

Linn, R. L., & Gronlund, N. E. (2000). Measurement and assessment in teaching (8th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ:

Prentice Hall.

Linnenbrink, E. A., & Pintrich P. R. (2003). The role of self-ef

ﬁcacy beliefs in student engagement and learning in

the classroom. Reading and Writing Quarterly, 19, 119

–137.

Lissitz, R. W., & Schafer, W. D. (2002). Assessment in educational reform: Both means and ends. Boston: Allyn &

Bacon.

Little, S. G., & Akin-Little, A. (2008). Psychology

‘s contributions to classroom management. Psychology in the

Schools, 45(3), 227

–234.

Lloyd, L. (1999). Multi-age classes and high ability students. Review of Educational Research, 69(2), 187

–212.

LoCicero, K. A., & Ashbly, J. S. (2000). Multidimensional perfectionism in middle school age gifted students: A

comparison to peers from the general cohort. Roeper Review, 22(3), 182

–185.

Locke, J. (1892). Some thoughts concerning education. In R. H.

Quick (Ed.), Locke on education (pp.1

–236). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. (Original work published

1690)

Locke, J. L. (1983). Phonological acquisition and change. New

York: Academic Press.

Locke, J. L. (1995). Development of the capacity for spoken language. In P. Fletcher & B. MacWhinney (Eds.), The

handbook of child language (pp. 278

–302). Cambridge, MA: Blackwell.

Lomawaima, K. T. (2003). Educating Native Americans. In J. A.

Banks & C. A. M. Banks (Eds.), Handbook of research on multi-cultural education (2nd ed., pp. 441

–461). New

York: Wiley.

Lopes, P., & Salovey, P. (2004). Toward a broader education:

Social, emotional, and practical skills. In J. E. Zins, R. P. Weiss-berg, M. C. Wang, & H. J. Walberg (Eds.), Building
school success on social and emotional learning. New York: Teachers College Press.

Losey, K. M. (1995). Mexican American students and classroom interaction: An overview and critique. Review of

Educational Research, 65, 283

–318.

Lotan, R. A., & Whitcomb, J. A. (1998). Groupwork in diverse classrooms. New York: Teachers College Press.
Lou, Y., Abrami, P. C., Spence, J. C., Poulsen, C., Chambers, B.,

& d

’Apollonia, S. (1996). Within-class grouping: A meta-analysis. Review of Educational Research,

66(4), 423

–458.

Lourenço, O., & Machado, A. (1996). In defense of Piaget

‘s theory: A reply to 10 common criticisms. Psychological

Review, 103(1), 143

–164.

Loveless, T. (1999). Will tracking reform promote social equity?

Educational Leadership, 56(7), 28

–32.

Lu, Z.-L., Williamson, S. J., & Kaufman, L. (1992). Behavioral lifetime of human auditory sensory memory predicted

by physiological measures. Science, 258, 1668

–1670.

Luekens, M. T., Lyter, D. M., & Fox, E. E. (2004). Teacher attrition and mobility. Results from the teacher follow-up

survey 2000

–2001. (NCES 2004-301). U.S. Department of Education. Washington, DC: National Center for

Education Statistics.

Luiten, J., Ames, W., & Ackerson, G. (1980). A meta-analysis of the effects of advance organizers on learning and

retention. American Educational Research Journal, 17(2), 211

–218.

references

609

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in609 609

10/17/08 10:05:17 AM

REFERENCES

Lummis, M., & Stevenson, H. W. (1990). Gender differences in beliefs and achievement: A cross-cultural study.

Developmental Psychology, 26, 254

–263.

Lund, N., & Duchan, J. (1988). Assessing children

’s language in naturalistic contexts. Upper Saddle River, NJ:

Prentice Hall.

Lynch, J. P. (2002, October). Trends in juvenile violent offending:

An analysis of victim survey data. Juvenile Justice Bulletin. Retrieved December 3, 2003 from
www.ojjdp.ncjrs.org/pubs/ delinq.html#191052.

Lynch, S., & Mills, C. (1990). The skills reinforcement program

(SRP): An academic program for high potential minority youth. Journal for the Education of the Gifted, 21,
95

–102.

Lynn, R. (1990). The role of nutrition in secular increases in intelligence. Personality and Individual Differences, 11,

273

–285.

Lyon, G. R. (1995). Toward a de

ﬁnition of dyslexia. Annals of

Dyslexia, 45, 3

–27.

Lyon, G. R., Fletcher, J. M., Shaywitz, S. E., Shaywitz, B. A.,

Wood, F. B., Schulte, A., & Olson, R. (2001). Rethinking learning disabilities. In C. E. Finn, Jr., A. J. Rotherham,
& C. R. Hokan-son, Jr. (Eds.), Rethinking special education for a new century (pp. 259

–287). Washington, DC:

Thomas B. Fordham Foundation and Progressive Policy Institute.

Ma, X. (1999). A meta-analysis of the relationship between anxiety toward mathematics and achievement in

mathematics. Journal for Research in Mathematics Education, 30, 520

–540.

Maag, J. W. (2001). Rewarded by punishment: Re

ﬂections on the disuse of positive reinforcement in schools.

Exceptional Children, 67, 173

–186.

Maccoby, E. E. (1990). The role of gender identity and gender constancy in sex-differentiated development. In K.

Shrader (Ed.), New directions for child development. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.

MacIver, D., Stipek, D., & Daniels, D. (1991). Explaining within-semester changes in student effort in junior high

school and senior high school courses. Journal of Educational Psychology, 83, 201

–211.

Mackenzie, A. A., & White, R. T. (1982). Fieldwork in geography and long-term memory structures. American

Educational Research Journal, 19(4), 623

–632.

MacKinnon, D. W. (1965). Personality and the realization of creative potential. American Psychologist, 20, 365.
Maclean, M., Bryant, P. E., & Bradley, L. (1987). Rhymes, nursery rhymes, and reading in early childhood.

Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 33, 255

–281.

MacMillan, D. L., & Siperstein, G. N. (2002). Learning disabilities as operationally de

ﬁned in schools. In R. Bradley,

L. Danielson, & D. P. Hallahan (Eds.), Identi

ﬁcation of learning disabilities: Research to practice (pp. 287–333).

Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Madsen, C. H., Becker, W. C., & Thomas, D. R. (1968). Rules, praise, and ignoring: Elements of elementary

classroom control. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1, 139

–150.

Maehr, M. L., & Midgley, C. (1991). Enhancing student motivation: A schoolwide approach. Educational

Psychologist, 26, 399

–427.

Maehr, M. L., & Nicholls, J. G. (1980). Culture and achievement motivation: A second look. In N. Warren (Ed.),

Studies in cross-cultural psychology, Vol. 2 (pp. 221

–267). New York: Academic Press.

Mager, R. (1975). Preparing instructional objectives (2nd ed.).

Belmont, CA: Lake.

Maier, N. R. F. (1933). An aspect of human reasoning. British

Journal of Psychology, 24, 144

–155.

Maier, N. R. F. (1937). Reasoning in rats and human beings. Psychological Review, 44, 365

–378.

Maker, C. J. (1996). Identi

ﬁcation of gifted minority students:

A national problem, needed changes and a promising solution. Gifted Child Quarterly, 40, 41

–50

Malone, M. R., & Lepper, M. R. (1983). Making learning fun.

In R. E. Snow & J. F. Marshall (Eds.), Aptitude, learning , and instruction: Cognitive and affective process analyses,
Vol. 3 (pp. 223

–253). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Mandara, J. (2006). The impact of family functioning on African

American males

‘ academic achievement: A review and clariﬁcation of the empirical literature. Teachers College

Record, 108(2), 206

–223.

Manderlink, G., & Harackiewicz, J. (1984). Proximal vs. distal goal setting and intrinsic motivation. Journal of

Personality and Social Psychology, 47, 918

–928.

Manning, B. H. (1991). Cognitive self-instruction for classroom processes. Albany, NY: New York Press.
Mansell, W., & Morris, K. (2004). A survey of parents

‘ reactions to the diagnosis of autistic spectrum disorder by a

local service. Autism, 8, 387

–407.

March, J. G., & Olson, J. P. (1989). Rediscovering institutions: The organizational basis of politics. New York: Free

Press.

Marcia, J. E. (1966). Development and validation of ego-identity status. Journal of Personality and Social

Psychology, 3, 551

–558.

Marcia, J. E. (1987). The identity status approach to the study of ego identity development. In T. Honess & K.

Yardley (Eds.), Self and identity: Perspectives across the lifespan. New York: Routledge & Kegan Paul.

Marcia, J. E. (1994). The empirical study of ego identity. In

H. A. Bosma, T. L. G. Graafsma, J. D. Grotevant, & D. J. de Levita (Eds.), Identity and development: An
interdisciplinary approach. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.

Marcotte, D., Lévesque, N., & Fortin, L. (2006). Variations of cognitive distortions and school performance in

depressed and non-depressed high school adolescents: A two-year longitudinal study. Cognitive Therapy
Research, 30, 211

–225.

Marini, A., & Genereux, R. (1995). The challenge of teaching for transfer. In A. McKeough, J. Lupart, & A. Marini

(Eds.), Teaching for transfer: Fostering generalization in learning (pp. 1

–20). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Marschark, M., West, S. H., Nall, L., & Everhart, V. (1986). Development of creative language devices in signed

and oral production. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 41, 534

–550.

Marsh, H. W., Hau, K. T., & Kong, C. K. (2002). Multilevel causal ordering of academic self-concept and

achievement: In

ﬂuence of language of instruction (English compared with

610

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in610 610

10/17/08 10:05:19 AM

REFERENCES

Chinese) for Hong Kong students. American Educational Research Journal, 39, 727

–763.

Marsh, H. W., Trautwein, U., Ludtke, O., Koller, O., & Baumert,

J. (2005). Academic self-concept, interest, grades, and standardized test scores: Reciprocal effects models of
causal ordering. Child Development, 76, 397

–416.

Marshall, H. H., & Weinstein, R. S. (1984). Classroom factors affecting students

‘ self-evaluations: An

interactional model. Review of Educational Research, 54, 301

–325.

Marshall, I. H. (2002). A study of the factors contributing to the attrition rate of public school teachers in Texas

(Doctoral dissertation, Texas A & M University, Kingsville Corpus Christi).

Marshall, S. P. (1994). Our gifted children: Are they asking too much? Gifted Child Quarterly, 38, 187

–192.

Martin, N. (Ed.). (1987). Writing across the curriculum. Upper

Montclair, NJ: Boynton/Cook.

Martinussen, R., Hayden, J., Hogg-Johnson, S., & Tannock, R.

(2005). A meta-analysis of working memory impairments in children with attention-de

ﬁcit/hyperactivity disorder.

Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 44(4), 377

–384.

Marzano, R. J. (1993). How classroom teachers approach the teaching of thinking. Theory into Practice, 32(3),

154

–160.

Marzano, R. J. (1995). Critical thinking. In J. H. Block, S. T. Ever-son, & T. R. Guskey (Eds.), School

improvement programs (pp. 57

–76). New York: Scholastic.

Marzano, R. J. (2000). Transforming classroom grading. Alexandria, VA: Association for Supervision

and Curriculum Development.

Marzano, R. J., Brandt, R. S., Hughes, C. S., Jones, B. F., Presseisen, B. Z., Rankin, S. C., & Suhor, C. (1988).

Dimensions of thinking: A framework for curriculum and instruction. Alexandria, VA: Association for
Supervision and Curriculum Development.

Marzano, R. J., Pickering, D. J., & Pollack, J. E. (2005). Classroom instruction that works: Research-based

strategies for increasing student achievement. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Merrill/ Prentice Hall.

Masataka, N. (1992). Pitch characteristics of Japanese maternal speech to infants. Journal of Child Language, 19,

213

–224.

Maslow, A. H. (1968). Toward a psychology of being (2nd ed.).

New York: Van Nostrand.

Maslow, A. H. (1970). Motivation and personality (2nd ed.). New

York: Harper and Row.

Mason, D. A., & Good, T. L. (1993). Effects of two-group and whole-class teaching on regrouped elementary

students

‘ mathematics achievement. American Educational Research Journal, 30, 328–360.

Masters, M. S., & Sanders, B. (1993). Is the gender difference in mental rotation disappearing? Behavior Genetics,

23, 337

–341.

Mastropieri, M. A., & Scruggs, T. E. (1984). Generalization: Five effective strategies. Academic Therapy, 19(4),

427

–431.

Mastropieri, M. A., Scruggs, T. E., & Butcher, K. (1997). How effective is inquiry learning for students with mild

disabilities? Journal of Special Education, 31(2), 199

–211.

Mastropieri, M. A., Scruggs, T. E., Hamilton, S. L., Wolfe, S.,

Whedon, C., & Canevaro, A. (1996). Promoting thinking skills of students with learning disabilities: Effects on
recall and comprehension of expository prose. Exceptionality, 6, 1

–11.

Mather, N., & Woodcock, R. J. (2001). Examiners manual: Woodcock-Johnson Tests of Achievement

–III. Itasca, IL:

Riverside.

Matson, J. L., & Nebel-Schwalm, M. (2007). Assessing challenging behaviors in children with autism spectrum

disorders: A review. Research in Developmental Disabilities, 28 (6), 567

–579.

Matsumo, D., & Ekman, P. (1989). American

–Japanese cultural differences in intensity ratings of facial expressions

of emotion. Motivation and Emotion, 13, 143

–157.

Matsumura, L. C., Slater, S. C., & Crosson, A. (2008). Classroom climate, rigorous instruction and curriculum, and

students

‘ interactions in urban middle schools. Elementary School Journal, 108(4), 293–312.

Mayer, D. P. (1998). Do new teaching standards undermine performance on old tests? Educational

Evaluation and Policy Analysis, 15, 1

–16.

Mayer, J. D., DiPaolo, M. T., & Salovey, P. (1990). Perceiving affective content in ambiguous visual stimuli: A

component of emotional intelligence. Journal of Personality Assessment, 54, 772

–781.

Mayer, R. (2000). Intelligence and education. In R. J. Sternberg

(Ed.), Handbook of intelligence (pp. 519

–533). New York: Cambridge University Press.

Mayer, R. E. (1992). Guiding students

‘ cognitive processing of scientiﬁc information. In M. Pressley, K. Harris, & J.

Guthrie (Eds.), Promoting academic competence and literacy: Cognitive research and instructional innovation (pp.
243

–258). Orlando, FL: Academic Press.

Mayer, R. E. (1996). Learning strategies for making sense out of expository text: The SOI model for guiding three

cognitive processes in knowledge construction. Educational Psychology Review, 8, 357

–371.

Mayer, R. E. (2001). Multimedia learning. New York: Cambridge

University Press.

Mayer, R. E. (2003). Learning and instruction. Upper Saddle

River, NJ: Merrill/Prentice Hall.

Mayer, R. E. (2004). Should there be a three-strikes rule against pure discovery learning? The case for guided

methods of instruction. American Psychologist, 59(1), 14

–19.

Mayer, R. E., & Wittrock, M. C. (1996). Problem-solving transfer. In D. C. Berliner & R. C. Calfee (Eds.), Handbook

of educational psychology (pp. 47

–62). New York: Simon & Schuster Macmillan.

Mayer, R. E., Quilici, J. L., & Moreno, R. (1999). What is learned in an after-school computer club? Journal of

Educational Computing Research, 20, 223

–235.

Mayes, S. D., Calhoun, S. L., & Crowell, E. W. (2000). Learning disabilities and ADHD: Overlapping spectrum

disorder. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 33, 417

–424.

Mayo, M. W., & Christenfeld, N. (1999). Gender, race, and performance expectations of college students. Journal of

Multi-cultural Counseling & Development, 27, 93

–104.

references

611

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in611 611

10/17/08 10:05:21 AM

REFERENCES

McCaslin, M., & Good, T. (1996). The informal curriculum. In

D. Berliner & R. Calfee (Eds.), Handbook of educational psychology (pp. 47

–62). New York: Macmillan.

McCoach, D. B., Kehle, T. J., Bray, M. A., & Siegle, D. (2001). Best practices in the identi

ﬁcation of gifted students

with learning disabilities. Psychology in the Schools, 38(5), 403

–411.

McComas, J. J., Thompson, A., & Johnson, L. (2003). The effects of precession attention on problem behavior

maintained by different reinforcers. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 36, 297

–307.

McDermott, R., Goldman, S., & Varenne, H. (2006). The cultural work of learning disabilities. Educational

Researcher, 35(6), 12

–17.

McDonough, G. P. (2005). Moral maturity and autonomy: Appreciating the signi

ﬁcance of Lawrence Kolhberg‘s Just

Community. Journal of Moral Education, 34, 199

–213.

McEwen, B. S. (1995). Stressful experience, brain, and emotions:

Developmental, genetic, and hormonal in

ﬂuences. In M. S. Gazzaniga (Ed.), The cognitive neurosciences (pp.

1117

–1135). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

McFaul, S. A. (1983). An examination of direct instruction. Educational Leadership, 40(7), 67

–69.

McGhee, P. (1979). Humor: Its origin and development. San Francisco: W. H. Freeman & Company.
McGoey, K. E., & DuPaul, G. J. (2000). Token reinforcement and response cost procedures: Reducing the

disruptive behavior of preschool children with attention-de

ﬁcit/hyperactivity disorder. School Psychology

Quarterly, 15, 330

–343.

McGoey, K. E., Eckert, T. L., & DuPaul, G. J. (2002). Early intervention for preschool-age children with ADHD: A

literature review. Journal of Emotional & Behavioral Disorders, 10, 14

–28.

McInerney, M., Reeve, A., & Kane, M. B. (1995). Synthesizing and verifying effective practices for children and

youth with Attention De

ﬁcit Disorder. Washington, DC: Chesapeake Institute.

McIntyre, T. (1990). The teacher

‘s role in cases of suspected child abuse. Education and Urban Society, 22(3),

300

–306.

McKenzie, J. A. (1986). The in

ﬂuence of identiﬁcation practices, race, and SES on the identiﬁcation of gifted

students. Gifted Child Quarterly, 30(2), 93

–95.

McLean, J., & Snyder-McLean, L. (1999). How children learn language. San Diego, CA: Singular Publishing Group.

McLennan, J. D., Lord, C., & Schopler, E. (1993). Sex differences in higher functioning people with autism. Journal

of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 23, 217

–227.

McLoyd, V. C. (1998). Socioeconomic disadvantage and child development. American Psychologist, 53, 185

–204.

McMillan, J. H. (2003). Understanding and improving teachers

‘ classroom assessment decision-making: Implications

for theory and practice. Educational Measurement: Issues and Practice, 22(4), 34

–43.

McMillan, J. H. (2007). Classroom assessment (4th ed.). Boston:

Allyn & Bacon.

McMullin, D., & Steffen, J. (1982). Intrinsic motivation and performance standards. Social Behavior and

Personality, 10, 47

–56.

McNeill, J., & Fowler, S. (1996, Summer). Using story reading to encourage children

‘s conversations. Teaching

Exceptional Children, 28(4), 43

–47.

Means, M. B., & Knapp, M. S. (1991). Cognitive approaches to teaching advanced skills to educationally

disadvantaged students. Phi Delta Kappan, 73(4), 282

–289.

Means, M. B., & Knapp, M. S. (1994). Cognitive approaches to teaching advanced skills to educationally

disadvantaged students. In H. F. Clarizio, W. A. Mehrens, & W. G. Hapkiewicz (Eds.), Contemporary issues in
educational psychology (6th ed., pp. 180

–190). New York: McGraw-Hill.

Medley, D., Soar, R., & Coker, H. (1984). Measurement-based evaluation of teacher performance. New York:

Longman.

Meece, J. (1981). Individual differences in the affective reactions of middle and high school students to mathematics:

A social cognitive perspective. Unpublished doctoral dissertation, University of Michigan.

Meece, J. L., Glienke, B. B., & Burg, S. (2006). Gender and motivation. Journal of School Psychology, 44, 351

–373.

Meese, R. L. (2001). Teaching learners with mild disabilities: Integrating research and practice (2nd ed.). Belmont,

CA: Thomson/Wadsworth.

Mehan, H. (1974). Accomplishing classroom lessons. In A.

Cicourel, K. Jennings, S. Jennings, K. Leiter, R. MacKay, H. Mehan, & D. Roth (Eds.), Language use and school
performance. New York: Academic Press.

Melnick, S. M., & Hinshaw, S. P. (1996). What they want and what they get: The social goals of boys with

ADHD and comparison boys. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 24, 169

–185.

Mendez, L. M., Knoff, H. M., & Ferron, J. M. (2002). School demographic variables and out-of-school

suspension rates: A quantitative and qualitative analysis of a large, ethnically diverse school district. Psychology
in the Schools, 39, 259

–277.

Menyuk, P. (1988). Language development: Knowledge and use.

Glenview, IL: Scott, Foresman/Little, Brown.

Mercer, C. D., Jordan, L., Allsopp, D. H., & Mercer, A. R. (1996).

Learning disabilities de

ﬁnitions and criteria used by state education departments. Learning Disability

Quarterly, 19, 217

–232.

Merikangas, K. R. (2005). Anxiety disorders: Epidemiology. In

B. J. Sadock & V. A. Sadock (Eds.), Kaplan & Sadock

’s comprehensive textbook of psychiatry (Vol. I, pp.

1720

–1727). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.

Mertler, C. A. (2001). Designing scoring rubrics for your classroom. Practical Assessment, Research, &

Evaluation, 7(25). Available online at http://PAREonline.net/getvn.asp?v= 7&n=3.

Merton, R. K. (1948). The self

–fulﬁlling prophecy. Antioch Review, 8, 193–210.

Merzenich, M. M. (2001). Cortical plasticity contributing to child development. In J. L. McClelland & R. S.

Siegler (Eds.), Mechanisms of cognitive development: Behavioral and neural perspectives (pp. 67

–95). Mahwah,

NJ: Erlbaum.

Mesquite, B., & Frijda, N. H. (1992). Cultural variations in emotion: A review. Psychological Bulletin, 112, 179

–204.

612

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in612 612

10/17/08 10:05:23 AM

REFERENCES

Mestre, J. P. (1984). The problem with problems: Hispanic students and math. Bilingual Journal, 32, 15

–19.

Mestre, J. P., & Cocking, R. R. (2000). The science of learning.

Special Issue of Journal of Applied Developmental Psychology 21(1), 1

–135.

Metcalfe, J. (2000). Metamemory: Theory and data. In E. Tulving & F. I. M. Craik (Eds.), The Oxford handbook of

memory (pp. 197

–211). Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press.

Metcalfe, J. (2002). Is study time allocated selectively to a region of proximal learning? Journal of Experimental

Psychology: General, 131, 349

–363.

Metcalfe, J., & Kornell, N. (2005). A region of proximal learning model of study time allocation. Journal of Memory

and Language, 52, 463

–477.

Metcalfe, J., & Mischel, W. (1999). A hot/cool system analysis of delay of grati

ﬁcation: Dynamics of willpower.

Psychological Review, 106, 3

–19.

Meyer, K. A. (2003). Face-to-face versus threaded discussions:

The role of time and higher order thinking. Journal of Asynchronous Learning Networks, 7(3), 55

–65.

Meyer, W. U., Bachmann, M., Biermann, U., Hempelmann, M.,

Plöger, F. O., & Spiller, H. (1979). The informational value of evaluative behavior: In

ﬂuences of praise and blame

on perceptions of ability. Journal of Educational Psychology, 71, 259

–268.

Michael, K. Y. (2001). The effect of a computer simulation activity versus hands-on activity in product creativity in

technology education. Journal of Technology Education, 13(1), 31

–43. Mickelson, R. (1990). The

attitude

–achievement paradox among black adolescents. Sociology of Education, 63, 44–61. Micklo, S. (1993).

Perceived problems of public school pre-kindergarten teachers. Journal of Research in Childhood Education,
8(1), 57

–68.

Middleton, M., & Midgley, C. (1997). Avoiding the demonstration of lack of ability: An under explored aspect of goal

theory. Journal of Educational Psychology, 89, 710

–718.

Midgley, C., Anderman, E., & Hicks, L. (1995). Differences between elementary and middle school teachers and

students: A goal theory approach. Journal of Early Adolescence, 15, 90

–113.

Midgley, C., & Feldlaufer, H. (1987). Students

‘ and teachers‘ decision-making ﬁt before and after the transition to

junior high school. Journal of Early Adolescence, 7, 225

–241.

Midgley, C., & Urdan, T. (1995). Predictors of middle school students

‘ use of self-handicapping strategies. Journal of

Early Adolescence, 15, 389

–411.

Miller, D., & Hom, H. (1997). Conceptions of ability and the interpretation of praise, blame, and material rewards.

Journal of Experimental Education, 65, 163

–177.

Miller, G., & Gildea, P. (1987). How children learn words. Scienti

ﬁc American, 257, 94–99.

Miller, G. A. (1956). The magical number seven, plus or minus two: Some limits on our capacity for processing

information. Psychological Review, 63, 81

–97.

Miller, K., & Baillargeon, R. (1990). Length and distance: Do preschoolers think that occlusion brings things

together? Developmental Psychology, 26, 103

–114.

Miller, L. S. (1995). An American imperative: Accelerating minority educational advancement. New Haven, CT: Yale

University Press.

Miller, M. D., & Seraphine, A. E. (1993). Can test scores remain authentic when teaching to the test? Educational

Assessment, 1, 119

–129.

Mills, C. J., & Durden, W. G. (1992). Cooperative learning and ability grouping: An issue of choice. Gifted Child

Quarterly, 36(1), 11

–16.

Miranda, A., & Presentación, M. J. (2000). Ef

ﬁcacy of cognitive-behavioral therapy in the treatment of children with

ADHD, with and without aggressiveness. Psychology in the Schools, 37, 169

–182.

Miranda, A., Presentación, M. J., & Soriano, M. (2002). Effectiveness of a school-based multicomponent program

for the treatment of children with ADHD. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 35, 546

–562.

Miri, B., David, B. C., & Uri, Z. (2007). Purposely teaching for the promotion of higher-order thinking skills: A case of

critical thinking. Research in Science Education, 37(4), 353

–369. Mischel, W., Shoda, Y., & Rodriguez, M. L.

(1989). Delay of grati

ﬁcation in children: Science, 244, 933–938.

Moeller, J., & Koeller, O. (1999). Spontaneous cognitions following academic test results. Journal of Experimental

Education, 67, 150

–164.

Mof

ﬁtt, T. E., Caspi, A., Harkness, A. R., & Silva, P. A. (1993). The natural history of change in intellectual

performance: Who changes? How much? Is it meaningful? Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 34,
455

–506.

Molden, D., & Dweck, C. (2000). Meaning and motivation. In

C. Sansone & J. Harackiewicz (Eds.), Intrinsic and extrinsic motivation: The search for optimal motivation and
performance (pp. 131

–159). San Diego, CA: Academic Press.

Molfese, D. L., Molfese, V. J., Key, A. F., & Kelly, S. D. (2003).

ﬂuence of environment on speech-sound discrimination: Findings from a longitudinal study.

Developmental Neuro-psychology, 24(2 & 3), 541

–558.

Moll, L. C. (2001). Through the mediation of others: Vygotskian research on teaching. In V. Richardson (Ed.),

Handbook of research on teaching (pp. 111

–129). Washington, DC: American Educational Research Association.

Montessori, M. (1964). Advanced Montessori method. Cambridge, MA: Bentley.

Montgomery, J. (2002, February). Understanding the language dif

ﬁculties of children with speciﬁc language

impairments: Does verbal working memory matter? American Journal of Speech Language Pathology, 11, 77

–91.

Montgomery, K. (2001). Authentic assessment: A guide for elementary teachers. New York: Longman.
Moody, S. W., Vaughn, S., & Schumm, J. S. (1997). Instructional grouping for reading. Remedial and Special

Education, 18, 347

–356.

Moore, C., & Dunham, P. (1995). Joint attention: Its origins and role in development. Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Moore, D., & Davenport, S. (1988). The new improved sorting machine. Madison, WI: National Center on Effective

Secondary Schools.

references

613

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in613 613

10/17/08 10:05:25 AM

REFERENCES

Moore, L. M. (1989). Ethnic group differences in the Armed

Services Vocational Aptitude Battery (ASVAB) performance of American youth: Implications for career
prospects. In
B. Gifford (Ed.), Test policy and test performance: Education, language, and culture (pp. 183

–229).

Boston: Kluwer Academic.

Morganett, L. (1991). Good teacher

–student relationships: A key in classroom motivation and management.

Education, 112(2), 260

–264.

Morin, V. A., & Miller, S. P. (1998). Teaching multiplication to middle school students with mental retardation.

Education & Treatment of Children, 21, 22

–36.

Morris, R. J., & Kratochwill, T. R. (1983). Treating children

’s fears and phobias. A behavioral approach. New York:

Pergamon.

Morris, R. J., & Kratochwill, T. R. (1998). Fears and phobias. In

R. J. Morris & T. R. Kratochwill (Eds.), The practice of child therapy (3rd ed.). Needham Heights, MA: Allyn &
Bacon.

Morrisette, P., Ricard, M., & Gouin-Decarie, T. (1995). Joint visual attention and pointing in infancy: A longitudinal

study of comprehension. British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 13, 163

–177.

Morrison, M., & Dungan, R. (1992). The identi

ﬁcation of creative thinking ability: A multifactored approach.

Columbus, OH: Ohio Department of Education.

Morrison, S. R., & Siegel, L. S. (1991). Learning disabilities: A critical review of de

ﬁnitional and assessment issues.

In J. E. Obrzut & G. W. Hynd (Eds.), Neuropsychological foundations of learning disabilities (pp. 79

–97). San

Diego, CA: Academic Press.

Morrow, L. (1989). Literacy development in the early years. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.
Morton, J. B., & Trhub, S. E. (2001). Children

‘s understanding of emotion in speech. Child Development, 72,

834

–843.

Moshman, D. (1997). Pluralist rational constructivism. Issues in Education: Contributions from Educational

Psychology, 3, 229

–234.

Moskal, B. M. (2000). Scoring rubrics: What, when, and how?

Practical Assessment, Research, & Evaluation, 7(3). Available online at http://PAREonline.net/getvn.asp?v=7&n=3.

Moskal, B. M. (2003). Recommendations for developing classroom performance assessments and scoring rubrics.

Practical Assessment, Research, & Evaluation, 8(14). Retrieved July 13, 2008 from
http://PAREonline.net/getvn.asp?v=8&n=14.

Moss, P. A. (2003). Reconceptualizing validity for classroom assessment. Educational Measurement: Issues

and Practice, 22(4), 13

–25.

Moyer, P. S. (2002). Are we having fun yet? How teachers use manipulatives to teach mathematics. Educational

Studies in Mathematics, 47, 175

–197.

MTA Cooperative Group. (1999a). Effects of comorbid anxiety, poverty, session attendance, and

community medication on treatment outcome in children with attention de

ﬁcit/hyperactivity disorder.

Archives of General Psychiatry, 56, 1088

–1096.

MTA Cooperative Group. (1999b). Fourteen-month randomized clinical trial of treatment strategies for

attention-de

ﬁcit

hyperactivity disorder. Archives of General Psychiatry, 56, 1073

–1086.

Mueller, C. M., & Dweck, C. S. (1998). Intelligence praise can undermine motivation and performance. Journal of

Personality and Social Psychology, 75, 33

–52.

Mulkey, L. M., Catsambis, S., Steelman, L. C., & Crain, R. L.

(2005). The long-term effects of ability grouping in mathematics: A national investigation. Social Psychology of
Education, 8, 137

–177.

Murdock, T. B. (1999). The social context of risk: Status and motivational predictors of alienation in middle school.

Journal of Educational Psychology, 91, 62

–75.

Murphy, P. K., & Woods, B. S. (1996). Situating knowledge in learning and instruction. Educational

Psychologist, 31, 141

–145.

Murray, J. (2006, May). Pedagogical implications of cognitive science research. Independent Teacher (e

–journal).

Murray-Close, D., Crick, N. R., & Calotti, K. (2006). Children

‘s moral reasoning regarding physical and

relational aggression. Social Development, 15, 345

–372.

Myers, D. G. (2005). Exploring psychology (6th ed. in modules).

New York: Worth.

Nagy, W., & Anderson, R. C. (1984). How many words are there in printed school English? Reading Research

Quarterly, 19, 304

–330.

Nagy, W., & Herman, P. (1987). Depth and breadth of vocabulary knowledge: Implications for acquisition and

instruction. In M. G. McKeown & M. E. Curtis (Eds.), The nature of vocabulary acquisition (pp. 19

–35). Hillsdale,

NJ: Erlbaum.

Nair, H., & Murray, A. D. (2005). Predictors of attachment security in preschool children from intact and divorced

families. Journal of Genetic Psychology, 166(3), 245

–263.

Naoi, N., Yokoyama, K., & Yamamoto, J. (2007). Intervention for tact as reporting in children with autism. Research

in Autism Spectrum Disorders, 1, 174

–184.

National Center for Education Statistics. (2000, January). America

’s kindergarteners. Washington, DC: U.S.

Department of Education. Of

ﬁce of Educational Research and Improvement (Report No. NCES–2000–070).

National Center for Innovation and Education. (1999). Lessons for life: How smart schools boost academic, social,

and emotional intelligence. Bloomington, IN: HOPE foundation (www
.communitiesofhope.org).

National Commission on Teaching and America

’s Future. (2003,

January). No dream denied: A pledge to America

’s children. Washington, DC.

National Reading Panel. (2000). Teaching children to read: An evidence-based assessment of the scienti

ﬁc

research literature on reading and its implications for reading instruction (NIH Pub. No. 00

–4769). Washington, DC:

National Institutes of Health.

National Research Council. (2000). How people learn: Brain, mind, experience and school. Washington, DC:

National Academy Press.

614

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in614 614

10/17/08 10:05:27 AM

REFERENCES

National Research Council. (2000). Improving intergroup relations among youth. Washington, DC:

National Research Council.

National Research Council. (2001). Adding it up: Helping children learn mathematics. J. Kilpatrick, J. Swafford, & B.

Find-ell (Eds.), Mathematics Learning Study Committee, Center for Education, Division of Behavioral and
Social Sciences and Education. Washington, DC: National Academy Press.

National Research Council. (2001). Knowing what students know. Washington, DC: National Academic

Press.

Naveh-Benjamin, M. (1991). A comparison of training programs intended for different types of test-anxious students:

Further support for an information processing model. Journal of Educational Psychology, 83(1), 134

–139.

Naveh-Benjamin, M., McKeachie, W. J., & Lin, Y. G. (1987). Two types of test-anxious students: Support for an

information processing model. Journal of Educational Psychology, 79(2), 131

–136.

Neisser, U., Boodoo, G., Bouchard, T. J. Jr., Boykin, A. W., Brody,

N., Ceci, S. J., Halpern, D. F., Loehlin, J. C., Perloff, R., Sternberg, R. J., & Urbina, S. (1996). Intelligence:
Knowns and unknowns. American Psychologist, 51(2), 77

–101.

Nelsen, J. (1997). No more logical consequences

—at least hardly ever! Focus on solutions. Empowering

People Catalog, Winter/Spring, 8.

Nelsen, J. L., Lott, L., & Glenn, H. (2000). Positive discipline in the classroom (3rd ed.). Roseville, CA: Prima.
Nelson, C. A., Thomas, K. M., & de Haan, M. (2006). Neural bases of cognitive development. In W. Damon & R.

Lerner (Eds.), Handbook of child psychology (6th ed.). New York: Wiley.

Nesdale, D., & Pickering, K. (2006). Teachers

‘ reactions to children‘s aggression. Social Development, 15(1),

109

–127.

Newell, A., & Simon, H. A. (1972). Human problem solving. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.
Newman, B. M., & Newman, P. R. (2001). Group identity and alienation: Giving the we its due. Journal of Youth and

Adolescence, 30, 515

–538.

Newman, F. M. (1990). Higher order thinking in teaching social studies: A rationale for the assessment of classroom

thoughtfulness. Journal of Curriculum Studies, 22, 41

–56.

Newson, J., & Newson, E. (1975). Intersubjectivity and the transmission of culture: On the social origins of symbolic

functioning. Bulletin of the British Psychological Society, 28, 437

–446.

Nicholls, J. (1979). Development of perception of own attainment and causal attributions for success and failure in

reading. Journal of Educational Psychology, 71, 94

–99.

Nicholls, J., Cobb, P., Wood, T., Yackel, E., & Patashnick, M.

(1990). Assessing students

‘ theories of success in mathematics: Individual and classroom differences. Journal for

Research in Mathematics Education, 21, 109

–122.

Nichols, J. D., Ludwin, W. G., & Iadicola, P. (1999). A darker shade of gray: A year-end analysis of discipline and

suspension data. Equity and Excellence in Education, 32, 43

–55.

Nickerson, R. S. (1984). Kinds of thinking taught in current programs. Educational Leadership, 42(1), 26

–37.

Nickerson, R. S., Perkins, D. N., & Smith, E. E. (1985). The teaching of thinking. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Nicoladis, E., & Genesee, F. (1996). Word awareness in second language learners and bilingual children. Language

Awareness, 5, 80

–90.

Nicoladis, E., & Genesee, F. (1997). Language development in preschool bilingual children. Journal of

Speech

–Language Pathology and Audiology, 21(4), 258–270.

Niebuhr, K., & Niebuhr, R. (1999). An empirical study of student relationships and academic achievement.

Education, 119(4), 679

–681.

Nippold, M., & Duthie, J. (2003). Mental imagery and idiom comprehension: A comparison of school-age

children and adults. Journal of Speech, Language, and Hearing Research, 46, 788

–799.

Nisbett, R. (1995). Race, IQ, and scientism. In S. Fraser (Ed.), The bell curve wars: Race, intelligence, and the future

of America (pp. 36

–57). New York: Basic Books.

Nishina, A., Juvonen, J., & Witkow, M. R. (2005). Sticks and stones may break my bones, but names will make me

feel sick: The psychosocial, somatic, and scholastic consequences of peer harassment. Journal of Clinical Child
and Adolescent Psychology, 34, 37

–48.

Nitko, A. J. (2001). Educational assessment of students (3rd ed.)

Upper Saddle River, NJ: Merrill.

Nitko, A. J., & Brookhart, S. M. (2007). Educational assessment of students (5th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ:

Pearson Merrill/ Prentice Hall.

Nottlemann, E. D., & Hill, K. T. (1977). Test anxiety an off-task behavior in evaluative situations. Child

Development, 48, 225

–231.

Nucci, L. (2006). Education for moral development. In M.

Killen & J. Smetana (Eds.), Handbook of moral development. Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

’Leary, K., & O’Leary, S. (Eds.). (1977). Classroom management: The successful use of behavior

modi

ﬁcation (2nd ed.). New York: Pergamon.

’Leary, K. D., Kaufman, K. F., Kass, R. E., & Drabman, R. S.

(1970). The effects of loud and soft reprimands on the behavior of disruptive students. Exceptional Children, 37,
145

–155.

’Mara, A. J., Marsh, H. W., Craven, R. G., & Debus, R. L. (2006).

Do self

–concept interventions make a difference? A synergistic blend of construct validation and meta–analysis.

Educational Psychologist, 41, 181

–206.

Oakes, J. (1985). Keeping track: How schools structure inequality.

New Haven. CT: Yale University Press.

Oakes, J. (1990a). Multiplying inequalities: The effects of race, social class, and tracking on opportunities to learn

mathematics and science. Santa Monica, CA: The RAND Corporation.

Oakes, J. (1990b). Opportunities, achievement, and choice:

Women and minority students in science and math. Review of Research in Education, 16, 153

–222.

references

615

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in615 615

10/17/08 10:05:29 AM

REFERENCES

Oakes, J. (1992). Can tracking research inform practice? Technical, normative, and political considerations.

Educational Researcher, 27(4), 12

–21.

Oakes, J., & Guiton, G. (1995). Matchmaking: The dynamics of high school tracking decisions. American

Educational Research Journal, 32, 3

–33.

Oakes, J., & Wells, A. S. (2002). Detracking for high student achievement. In L. Abbeduto (Ed.), Taking sides:

Clashing views and controversial issues in educational psychology (2nd ed., pp. 26

–30). Guilford, CT: McGraw-Hill

Duskin.

Oberauer, K. (2002). Access to information in working memory:

Exploring the focus of attention. Journal of Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory, and Cognition, 28,
411

–421.

Oberauer, K. (2005). Control of the contents of working memory

—a comparison of two paradigms and two age

groups. Journal of Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory, and Cognition, 31, 714

–728.

Obler, L., & Gjerlow, K. (1999). Language and the brain. New

York: Cambridge University Press.

Ochs, E., & Schieffelin, B. B. (1984). Language acquisition and socialization: Three developmental stories and their

implications. In R. Shweder and R. LeVine (Eds.), Developmental pragmatics (pp. 276

–320). New York: Academic

Press.

Odden, H., & Rochat, P. (2004). Observational learning and enculturation. Educational and Child Psychology, 21,

–50.

ﬁcial Brain Gym Website. (2005). Retrieved October 2, 2005, from http://www.braingym.org/.

Ogbu, J. U. (1994). Racial strati

ﬁcation and education in the

United States: Why inequality persists. Teachers College Record, 96(2), 264

–298.

Ogbu, J. U. (2003). Black American students in an af

ﬂuent suburb: A study of academic disengagement.

Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Ogden, M. H. (1968). The ful

ﬁllment of promise: 40 year follow-up of the Terman gifted group. Genetic Psychology

Monographs, 77, 3

–93.

Ogle, D. S. (1986). K-W-L group instructional strategy. In A. S.

Palincsar, D. S. Ogle, B. F. Jones, & E. G. Carr (Eds.), Teaching reading as thinking (Teleconference Resource
Guide, pp. 11

–17). Alexandria, VA: Association of Supervision and Curriculum Development.

Okagaki, L., & Sternberg, R. J. (1993). Parental beliefs and children

‘s school performance. Child Development, 64,

–56.

Ollendick, T., King, N., & Muris, P. (2002). Fears and phobias in children: Phenomenology, epidemiology, and

aetiology. Child and Adolescent Mental Health, 7, 98

–106.

Olson, R. K., Wise, B., Ring, J., & Johnson, M. (1997). Computer-based remedial training in phoneme awareness

and phono-logical decoding: Effects on the posttraining development of word recognition. Scienti

ﬁc Studies of

Reading, 1(3), 235

–253.

Oosterhoff, A. (1999). Developing and using classroom assessments (2nd ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice

Hall.

Orlofsky, J. L., Marcia, J. E., & Lesser, R. M. (1973). Ego identity status and the intimacy versus isolation crisis of

young adulthood. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 27, 211

–219.

Ormrod, J. E. (1995). Educational psychology: Developing learners. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.
Ornstein, P. A., Naus, M. J., & Liberty, C. (1975). Rehearsal and organizational processes in children

‘s memory.

Child Development, 46, 818

–830.

Ornstein, R. (1997). The right mind: Making sense of the hemispheres. San Diego, CA: Harcourt Brace.
Osborn, A. (2006). Public school teacher attrition and organizational health: A comparative study. (Doctoral

dissertation, University of Texas at Austin).

Osborne, R. J., & Wittrock, M. C. (1983). Learning science: A generative process. Science Education, 67, 489

–504.

Osburn, H. K., & Mumford, M. D. (2006). Creativity and planning: Training interventions to develop creative

problem-solving skills. Creativity Research Journal, 18(2), 173

–190.

Osher, D., Cartledge, G., Oswald, D., Sutherland, K. S., Artiles,

A. J., & Coutinho, M. (2004). Cultural and linguistic competency and disproportionate representation. In R. B.
Rutherford, M. M. Quinn, & S. B. Mathur (Eds.), Handbook of research in emotional and behavioral disorders (pp.
54

–77). New York: Guilford Press.

Ostad, S. A. (1998). Developmental differences in solving arithmetic word problems and simple number-fact

problems: A comparison of mathematically normal and mathematically disabled children. Mathematical Cognition,
4, 1

–19.

Otto, B. (2006). Language development in early childhood (2nd ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Merrill/Prentice Hall.
Owens, R. (1988). Language development. Upper Saddle River,

NJ: Merrill/Prentice Hall.

Owens, R. (2005). Language development: An introduction (6th ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

Paivio, A. (1971). Imagery and verbal processes. Fort Worth, TX:

Harcourt Brace.

Pajares, F., & Johnson, M. J. (1996). Self-ef

ﬁcacy beliefs in the writing of high school students: A path analysis.

Psychology in the Schools, 33, 163

–175.

Pajares, F., & Kranzler, J. (1995). Self-ef

ﬁcacy beliefs and general mental ability in mathematical problem solving.

Contemporary Educational Psychology, 20, 426

–443.

Pajares, F., & Valiante, G. (2001). In

ﬂuence of self-efﬁcacy on elementary students‘ writing. Journal of

Educational Research, 90(6), 353

–360.

Palincsar, A. S. (1998). Social constructivist perspectives on teaching and learning. In J. T., Spence, J. M.

Darley, & D. J. Foss (Eds.), Annual review of psychology (pp. 345

–375). Palo Alto, CA: Annual Reviews.

Palincsar, A. S. (2003). Ann L. Brown: Advancing a theoretical model of learning and instruction. In B. J. Zimmerman

& D. H. Schunk (Eds.), Educational psychology: A century of contributions (pp. 459

–476). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Palincsar, A. S., & Brown, A. L. (1984). Reciprocal teaching of comprehension-fostering and

comprehension-monitoring activities. Cognition & Instruction, 1, 117

–175.

616

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in616 616

10/17/08 10:05:30 AM

REFERENCES

Palincsar, A. S., Brown, A. L., & Martin, S. M. (1987). Peer interaction in reading comprehension instruction.

Educational Psychologist, 22, 231

–253.

Paller, K. A., Ranganath, C., Gonsalves, B., LaBar, K. S., Parrish,

T. B., Gitelman, D. R., Mesulam, M. M., & Reber, P. J. (2003). Neural correlates of person recognition. Learning
& Memory, 10, 253

–260.

Palmer, E. J. (2005). The relationship between moral reasoning and aggression, and the implications for practice.

Psychology, Crime & Law, 11, 353

–361.

Paris, S. G., Byrnes, J. P., & Paris, A. H. (2001). Constructing theories, identities, and actions of self-regulated

learners. In B.
J. Zimmerman & D. H. Schunk (Eds.), Self-regulated learning and academic achievement: Theoretical perspectives
(2nd ed., pp. 253

–287). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Park, K. A., & Walters, E. (1989). Security of attachment and preschool friendships. Child Development, 60,

1076

–1081.

Parke, B. N., & Byrnes, P. (1984). Toward objectifying the measurement of creativity. Roeper Review, 6, 216

–218.

Parker, W. D. (1997). An empirical typology of perfectionism in academically talented children. American Educational

Research Journal, 34, 545

–562.

Parrish, T. (2002). Racial disparities in the identi

ﬁcation, funding, and provision of special education. In D. Losen

(Ed.), Minority issues in special education (pp. 15

–38). Cambridge, MA: Civil Rights Project, Harvard University and

Harvard Education Publishing Group.

Parsley, K., & Corcoran, C. A. (2003). The classroom teacher

‘s role in preventing school failure. Kappa Delta Pi

Record, 39(2), 84

–87.

Pastor, P. N., & Reuben, C. A. (2002). Attention de

ﬁcit disorder and learning disability: United States, 1997–98.

National Center for Health Statistics. Vital Health Statistics, 10(206), 1

–18.

Pastorelli, C., Caprara, G. V., Barbaranelli, C., Rola, J., Rozsa, S.,

& Bandura, A. (2001). The structure of children

‘s perceived self-efﬁcacy: A cross-national study. European Journal

of Psychological Assessment, 17, 87

–97.

Patrick, H., Anderman, L. H., Ryan, A. M., Edelin, K. C., & Midgley, C. (2001). Teachers

‘ communication of goal

orientations in four

ﬁfth grade classrooms. Elementary School Journal, 102, 35–58.

Patrick, H., Turner, J. C., Meyer, D. K., & Midgley, C. (2003). How teachers establish psychological

environments during the

ﬁrst days of school: Associations with avoidance in mathematics. Teachers College

Record, 105, 1521

–1558.

Patterson, K., & Wright, A. (1990). The speech, language of hearing-impaired child: At-risk academically. Childhood

Education, 67(2), 91

–95.

Patterson, P. O. (1989). Employment testing and Title VII of the

Civil Rights Act of 1964. In B. Gifford (Ed), Test policy and the politics of opportunity allocation: The workplace and
the law (pp. 83

–120). Boston: Kluwer Academic.

Paul, R. (1990). Critical thinking: What every person needs to survive in a rapidly changing world. Rohnert Park, CA:

Center for Critical Thinking and Moral Critique.

Paul, R., Binker, A. J. A., Martin, D., & Adamson, K. (1989). Critical thinking handbook: High school. Rohnert Park,

CA: Center for Critical Thinking and Moral Critique.

Paul, R., & Elder, L. (2006). The miniature guide to critical thinking: Concepts and tools. Dillon Beach, CA:

Foundation for Critical Thinking.

Pavlov, I. (1927/1960). Conditioned re

ﬂexes: An investigation of the physiological activity of the cerebral cortex.

Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Payne, A., Whitehurst, G., & Angell, A. (1994). The role of home literacy environment in the development of

language ability in preschool children from low-income families. Early Childhood Research Quarterly, 9(3

–4),

427

–440.

Payton, J. W., Graczyk, P. A., Wardlaw, D. M., Bloodworth,

M. R., Tompsett, C. J., & Weissberg, R. P. (2000). Social and emotional learning: A framework for

promoting mental health and reducing risk behavior in children and youth. Journal of School Health, 70, 179

–185.

Pea, R. D. (1987). Socializing the knowledge transfer problem.

International Journal of Educational Research, 11, 639

–663.

Pearson, B. (1998). Assessing lexical development in bilingual babies and toddlers. International Journal of

Bilingualism, 2(3), 347

–372.

Pedulla, J., Abrams, L., Madaus, G., Russell, M., Ramos, M., &

Miao, J. (2003). Perceived effects of state-mandated testing programs on teaching and learning: Findings from a
national survey of teachers. Chestnut Hill, MA: National Board on Educational Testing and Public Policy, Boston
College.

Peled, Z., & Wittrock, M. C. (1990). Generative meanings in the comprehension of word problems in mathematics.

Instructional Science, 19, 171

–205.

Pelham W. E., & Fabiano, G. (2001). Behavior modi

ﬁcation.

Child and Adolescent Psychiatry Clinics of North America, 9(3), 671

–688.

Pelham, W. E., & Gnagy, E. M. (1999). Psychosocial and combined treatments for ADHD. Mental Retardation and

Developmental Disabilities, 5, 225

–236.

Pelham, W. E., & Hoza, B. (1996). Intensive treatment: A summer treatment program for children with ADHD. In E.

Hibbs & H. Jensen (Eds.) Psychosocial treatment for child and adolescent disorders: Empirically based strategies
for clinical practice (pp. 311

–340). New York: American Psychological Association Press.

Pelham, W. E., & Molina, B. S. G. (2003). Childhood predictors of adolescent substance use in a longitudinal study

of children with ADHD. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 112, 497

–507.

Pelham, W. E., Wheeler, T., & Chronis, A. (1998). Empirically supported psychosocial treatments for attention

ﬁcit hyperactivity disorder. Journal of Clinical Child Psychology, 27, 190–205.

Pellegrini, A., & Smith, P. K. (1993). School recess. Review of Educational Research, 63, 51

–67.

Pellegrini, A. D. (2002). Bullying, victimization, and sexual harassment during the transition to middle school.

Educational Psychologist, 37, 151

–163.

references

617

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in617 617

10/17/08 10:05:32 AM

REFERENCES

Pellegrini, A. D., & Bohn, C. M. (2005, January/February). The role of recess in children

‘s cognitive performance

and school adjustment. Educational Researcher, 34(1), 13

–19.

Pellegrini, A. D., Huberty, P. D., & Jones, I. (1995). The effects of recess timing on children

‘s playground and

classroom behaviors. American Educational Research Journal, 32, 845

–864. Pellegrino, J. W., Chudowsky, N., &

Glaser, R. (2001). Knowing what students know. Washington, DC: National Academy Press.
Pepicello, W., & Weisberg, R. (1983). Linguistics and humor. In
P. McGhee & J. Goldstein (Eds.), Handbook of humor research: Vol. 1. Basic issues (pp. 59

–83). New York:

Springer-Verlag. Perfetti, C., & Bolger, D. (2004). The brain might read that way.

Scienti

ﬁc Studies of Reading, 8, 293–304.

Perfetti, C. A. (1985). Reading ability. New York: Oxford University Press.
Perfetti, C. A. (1992). The representation problem in reading acquisition. In P. B. Gough, L. Ehri, & R. Treiman

(Eds.), Reading acquisition (pp. 145

–174). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Perfetti, C. A., & Lesgold, A. M. (1977). Discourse comprehension and sources of individual differences. In

M. Just &
P. Carpenter (Eds.), Cognitive processes in comprehension (pp. 141

–183). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Perkins, D., Jay, E., & Tishman, S. (1993). Beyond abilities: A dispositional theory of thinking. Merrill-Palmer

Quarterly, 39(1), 1

–21.

Perkins, D., Jay, E., & Tishman, S. (1993). New conceptions of thinking: From ontology to education. Educational

Psychologist, 28(1), 67

–85.

Perkins, D. F., & Borden, L. M. (2003). Positive behaviors, problem behaviors, and resiliency in adolescence. In R.

M. Lerner,
M. A. Easterbrooks, & J. Mistry (Eds.), Handbook of psychology: Vol. 6. Developmental psychology (pp. 373

–394).

Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.

Perkins, D. N. (1995). Outsmarting IQ: The emerging science of learnable intelligence. New York: Free Press.
Perlman, C. (2002). An introduction to performance assessment scoring rubrics. In C. Boston (Ed.), Understanding

scoring rubrics (pp. 5

–13). University of Maryland: ERIC Clearinghouse on Assessment and Evaluation.

Perry, M. (1991). Learning and transfer: Instructional conditions and conceptual change. Cognitive Development, 6,

449

–468. Peterson, L., & Fennema, E. (1985). Effective teaching, student engagement in classroom activities, and

sex-related differences in learning mathematics. American Educational Research Journal, 22, 309

–335.

Peterson, L. R., & Peterson, M. J. (1959). Short-term retention of individual items. Journal of Experimental

Psychology, 58, 193

–198.

Peterson, P. L. (1988). Teachers

‘ and students‘ cognitional knowledge for classroom teaching and learning.

Educational Researcher, 17(5), 5

–14.

Peterson, P. L., Fennema, E., Carpenter, T. P., & Loef, M. (1989).

Teachers

‘ pedagogical content beliefs in mathematics. Cognition and Instruction, 6, 1–40.

Petitto, L. A., Holowka, S., Sergio, L. E., & Ostry, D. (2001). Language rhythms in baby hand movements. Nature,

413, 35

–36.

Petitto, L. A., Katerelos, M., Levy, B. G., Gauna, K., Tetreault, K.,

& Ferraro, V. (2001b). Bilingual signed and spoken language acquisition from birth: Implications for the
mechanisms underlying early bilingual language acquisition. Journal of Child Language, 28(2), 453

–496.

Peverly, S. T., Brobost, K. E., Graham, M., & Shaw, R. (2003).

College adults are not good at self-regulation: A study on the relationship of self-regulation, note taking, and test
taking. Journal of Educational Psychology, 95, 335

–346.

Peverly, S. T., Brobost, K. E., & Morris, K. S. (2002). The contribution of reading comprehension ability and

metacognitive control to the development of studying in adolescence. Journal of Research in Reading, 25,
203

–216.

Pew Internet and American Life Project. (2007). Cyberbullying and online teens. Retrieved from

http://www.pewinternet
.org/PPF/r/216/report_display.asp.

Pfeifer, M., Goldsmith, H. H., Davidson, R. J., & Rickman, M.

(2002). Continuity and change in inhibited and uninhibited children. Child Development, 73, 1474

–1485.

ﬁffner, L. J., & Barkely, R. A. (1998). Treatment of ADHD in school settings. In R. A. Barkley (Ed.), Attention-deﬁcit

hyperactivity disorder: A handbook for diagnosis and treatment (2nd ed., pp. 458

–490). New York: Guilford Press.

ﬁffner, L. J., & O’Leary, S. G. (1987). The efﬁcacy of all-positive management as a function of the prior use of

negative consequences. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 20, 265

–271. Phinney, J. S. (1989). Stages of ethnic

identity in minority group adolescents. Journal of Early Adolescence, 9, 163

–173. Phinney, J. S. (1990). Ethnic

identity in adolescents and adults:

Review of research. Psychological Bulletin, 108(3), 499

–514. Piaget, J. (1924). Judgment and reasoning in the

child. Neuchatel, Switzerland: Delachaux et Niestle.
Piaget. J. (1926). The child

’s conception of the world. Paris:

Alcan.

Piaget, J. (1932). The moral judgment of the child. Glencoe, IL:

Free Press.

Piaget, J. (1945/1962). Play, dreams, and imitation in childhood.

New York: Norton.

Piaget, J. (1950). The psychology of intelligence. London:

Routledge & Kegan Paul.

Piaget, J. (1954). The construction of reality in the child. New

York: Basic Books.

Piaget, J. (1962). Comments on Vygostky

’s critical remarks concerning ―The Language and Thought of the Child,‖

and

―Judgment and Reasoning in the Child.‖ Boston: MIT Press.

Piaget, J. (1963). Origins of intelligence in children. New York:

Norton.

Piaget, J. (1970). Piaget

‘s theory. In P. H. Mussen (Ed.), Carmichael’s manual of child psychology

(pp. 703

–732). New York: Wiley.

Piaget, J. (1972). The psychology of intelligence. Totowa, NJ:

Little

ﬁeld Adams.

Piaget, J. (1972a). Intellectual evolution from adolescence to adulthood. Human Development, 15, 1

–12.

Piaget, J. (1972b). Problems of genetic psychology. Paris:

Gonthier.

618

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in618 618

10/29/08 9:49:03 AM

REFERENCES

Piaget, J. (1976a). Postscript. Archives de Psychologie, 44,

223

–228.

Piaget, J. (1976b). The grasp of consciousness: Action and concept in the young child. Cambridge, MA. Harvard

University Press.

Piaget, J. (1985). The equilibration of cognitive structures: The central problem of intellectual development (T. Brown

& K. L. Thampy, Trans.). Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Pickar, D. B., & Tori, C. D. (1986). The learning disabled adolescent: Eriksonian Psychosocial development,

self-concept, and delinquent behavior. Journal of Youth and Adolescence, 15(5), 429

–440.

Pierce, W., Lemke, E., & Smith, R. (1988). Critical thinking and moral development in secondary students. High

School Journal, 71(3), 120

–126.

Piirto, J. (2007). Talented children and adults: Their development and education (3rd ed.). Waco, TX: Prufrock

Press.

Pillow, B. H. (2002). Children

‘s and adults‘ evaluation of the certainty of deductive inferences, inductive inferences,

and guesses. Child Development, 73, 779

–792.

Pinker, S. (1997). How the mind works. New York: Norton.
Pintrich, P. R. (2000). An achievement goal theory perspective on issues in motivation terminology, theory, and

research. Contemporary Educational Psychology, 25, 92

–104.

Pintrich, P. R. (2003). A motivational science perspective on the role of student motivation in learning and teaching.

Journal of Educational Psychology, 95, 667

–686.

Pintrich, P. R., & DeGroot, E. V. (1990). Motivational and self-regulated learning components of classroom

academic performance. Journal of Educational Psychology, 82, 33

–40.

Pintrich, P. R., & Garcia, T. (1991). Student goal orientation and self-regulation in the college classroom. In M. L.

Maehr &

P. R. Pintrich (Eds.), Advances in motivation and achievement: Goals and self-regulatory processes, Vol. 7
(pp. 371

–402). Greenwich, CT: JAI Press.

Pintrich, P. R., & Schunk, D. H. (2002). Motivation in education:

Theory, research, and applications (2nd ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Merrill/Prentice Hall.

Pittman, T. S., Cooper, E. E., & Smith, T. W. (1977). Attribution of causality and the overjusti

ﬁcation effect.

Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 3, 280

–283.

Plake, B. S., Impara, J. C., & Fager, J. J. (1993). Assessment competencies of teachers: A national survey.

Educational Measurement: Issues and Practice, 10(4), 12

–15.

Plaks, J., Stroessner, S., Dweck, C., & Sherman, J. (2001). Person theories and attention allocation: Preferences

for stereotypic versus counterstereotypic information. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 80, 876

–893.

Plant, R., & Ryan, R. M. (1985). Intrinsic motivation and the effects of self-consciousness, self-awareness, and

ego-involvement: An investigation of internally controlling styles. Journal of Personality, 53, 435

–449.

Plass, J. A., & Hill, K. T. (1986). Children

‘s achievement strategies and test performance: The role of time pressure,

evaluation, anxiety, and sex. Developmental Psychology, 22, 31

–36.

Pogrow, S. (2005). HOTS revisited: A thinking development approach to reducing the learning gap after grade 3. Phi

Delta Kappan, 87, 64

–75.

Pong, S. (1997). Family structure, school context, and eighth-grade math and reading achievement. Journal of

Marriage and the Family, 59(3), 734

–746.

Pong, S. (1998). The school compositional effect of single parenthood on 10th-grade achievement. Sociology of

Education, 71(1), 23

–43.

Pong, S., Hao, L, & Gardner, E. (2005). The roles of parenting styles and social capital in the school performance of

immigrant Asian and Hispanic adolescents. Social Science Quarterly, 86(4), 928

–950.

Popham, W. J. (2005). Classroom assessment (4th ed.). Boston:

Allyn & Bacon.

Popham, W. J. (2006). Assessment for educational leaders. Boston: Pearson.
Posner, M. I. (1995). Attention in cognitive neuroscience: An overview. In M. S. Gazzaniga (Ed.), The cognitive

neurosciences (pp. 615

–624). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

Posner, M. I., & Raichle, M. E. (1994). Images of mind. New York:

Scienti

ﬁc American Library.

Posner, M. I., & Rothbart, M. K. (2007). Educating the human brain. Washington, DC: American Psychological

Association.

Powers, K. (2005). Authentic assessment. In S. W. Lee (Ed.), Encyclopedia of school psychology. Thousand Oaks,

CA: Sage.

Prawat, R. S. (1989). Promoting access to knowledge, strategy, and disposition in students: A research synthesis.

Review of Educational Research, 59, l

–41.

Premack, D. (1959). Toward empirical behavior laws: I. Positive reinforcement. Psychological Review, 66, 219

–233.

Premack, D. (1963). Rate differential reinforcement in monkey manipulation. Journal of Experimental Analysis of

Behavior, 6, 81

–89.

Premack, D. (1965). Reinforcement theory. In D. Levine (Ed.), Nebraska Symposium on Motivation. Lincoln, NB:

University of Nebraska Press.

Pressley, M., & Woloshyn, V. (1995). Cognitive strategy instruction that really improves children

’s academic

performance. Cambridge, MA: Brookline Books.

Prinstein, M. J., & La Greca, A. M. (2002). Peer crowd af

ﬁliation and internalizing distress in childhood and

adolescence: A longitudinal follow-back study. Journal of Research on Adolescence, 12(3), 325

–351.

Proctor, C. P., August, D., Carlo, M. S., & Snow, C. E. (2006). The intriguing role of Spanish language vocabulary

knowledge in predicting English reading comprehension. Journal of Educational Psychology, 98(1), 159

–169.

Proshansky, E., & Wolfe, M. (1974). The physical setting and open education. School Review, 82, 557

–574.

Pugh, K. J., & Bergin, D. A. (2006). Motivational in

ﬂuences on transfer. Educational Psychologist, 41(3), 147–160.

Purdie, N., & Hattie, J. (1996). Cultural differences in the use of strategies for self-regulated learning. American

Educational Research Journal, 33, 845

–871.

references

619

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in619 619

10/17/08 10:05:36 AM

REFERENCES

Pylyshyn, Z. W. (1984). Computation and cognition. Cambridge,

MA: MIT Press.

Quadrel, M. J., Fischhoff, B., & Davis, W. (1993). Adolescent

(in)vulnerability. American Psychologist, 48, 102

–116.

Quinn, M. M., Kavale, K. A., Mathur, S. R., Rutherford, R. B., &

Forness, S. R. (1999). A meta-analysis of social skill interventions for students with emotional or behavioral
disorders. Journal of Emotional & Behavioral Disorders, 7, 54

–64.

Ramey, C. T. (1994). Abecedarian project. In R. J. Sternberg (Ed.),

Encyclopedia of human intelligence (Vol. 1, pp. 1

–3). New York: Macmillan.

Randhawa, B. (1994). Self-ef

ﬁcacy in mathematics, attitudes, and achievement of boys and girls from restricted

samples in two countries. Perceptual & Motor Skills, 79, 1011

–1018.

Raphael, T., & Hiebert, E. (1996). Creating an integrated approach to literacy instruction. Fort Worth, TX: Harcourt

Brace.

Rapport, M. D., Murphy, H. A., & Bailey, J. S. (1982). Ritalin vs. response cost in the control of hyperactive

children: A within-subject comparison. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 15, 205

–216.

Ratner, N. (2004, January). Caregiver

–child interactions and their impact on children‘s ﬂuency: Implications

for treatment. Language, Speech and Hearing Services in Schools, 35, 46

–56.

Rayner, K., Foorman, B. R., Perfetti, C. A., Pesetsky, D., & Seidenberg, M. S. (2001). How psychological science

informs the teaching of reading. Psychological Science in the Public Interest, 2, 31

–74.

Read, C. R. (1991). Achievement and career choices: Comparisons of males and females. Roeper Review, 13,

188

–193.

Reddy, G. L., Ramar, R., & Kusama, A. (2000). Education of children with special needs. New Delhi: Discovery.
Reed, S. K. (1987). A structure-mapping model for word problems. Journal of Experimental Psychology: Learning,

Memory, and Cognition, 13(1), 124

–139.

Reed, S. K., Ernst, G. W., & Banerji, R. (1974). The role of analogy in transfer between similar problem

states. Cognitive Psychology, 6, 436

–450.

Reeve, J., & Deci, E. L. (1996). Elements of the competitive situation that affect intrinsic motivation. Personality and

Social Psychology Bulletin, 22, 24

–33.

Reid, D. K., & Knight, M. G. (2006). Disability justi

ﬁes exclusion of minority students: A critical history grounded in

disability studies. Educational Researcher, 35(6), 18

–23.

Reis, S. M., & Purcell, J. H. (1993). An analysis of content elimination and strategies used by elementary classroom

teachers in the curriculum compacting process. Journal for the Education of the Gifted, 16(2), 147

–170.

Reis, S. M., & Renzulli, J. S. (2004). Current research on the social and emotional development of gifted and

talented students: Good news and future possibilities. Psychology in the Schools, 41(1), published online in Wiley
InterScience (www
.interscience.wiley.com).

Rejskind, G. (2000). TAG teachers: Only the creative need apply.

Roeper Review, 22, 153

–157.

Renkl, A., & Atkinson, R. K. (2003). Structuring the transition from example study to problem solving in cognitive

skill acquisition: A cognitive load perspective. Educational Psychologist, 38, 15

–22.

Renkl, A., Mandl, H., & Gruber, H. (1996). Inert knowledge: Analyses and remedies. Educational Psychologist, 31,

115

–121.

Renne, C. H. (1997). Excellent classroom management. Belmont,

CA: Wadsworth.

Renzulli, J. S. (1978a). The compactor. Mans

ﬁeld Center, CT: Creative Learning Press.

Renzulli, J. S. (1978b). What makes giftedness? Reexamining a de

ﬁnition. Phi Delta Kappan, 60, 180–184, 261.

Renzulli, J. S. (1988). Technical report of research studies related to the enrichment triad/revolving door model (3rd

ed.). Teaching The Talented (TTT) program, University of Connecticut.

Renzulli, J. S. (1990). A practical system for identifying gifted and talented students. Early Child Development and

Care, 63, 9

–18.

Renzulli, J. S. (1999). What is this thing called giftedness, and how do we develop it? A twenty-

ﬁve year perspective.

Journal for the Education of the Gifted, 23(1), 3

–54.

Renzulli, J. S. (2002). Emerging conceptions of giftedness: Building a bridge to the new century. Exceptionality,

10(2), 67

–75.

Renzulli, J. S., & Reis, S. M. (1991). The reform movement and the quiet crisis in gifted education. Gifted Child

Quarterly, 35, 26

–35.

Renzulli, J. S., & Reis, S. M. (2004). Curriculum compacting: A research-based differentiation strategy for culturally

diverse talented students. In D. Boothe & J. C. Stanley (Eds.), In the eyes of the beholder: Critical issues for
diversity in gifted education (pp. 87

–100). Waco, TX: Prufrock Press.

Renzulli, J. S., Smith, L., & Reis, S. (1982). Curriculum compacting: An essential strategy for working with gifted

students. Elementary School Teacher, 82(3), 185

–194.

Reschly, D. J. (1989). Incorporating adaptive behavior de

ﬁcits into instructional programs. In G. A. Robinson, J. R.

Patton,
E. A. Polloway, & L. R. Sargent (Eds.), Best practices in mild mental retardation. Reston, VA: Division of Mental
Retardation Council for Exceptional Children.

Rescorla, R. A. (1988). Pavlovian conditioning: It

‘s not what you think. American Psychologist, 43, 151–160.

Resnick, L. B. (1987). Education and learning to think. Washington, DC: National Academy Press.

Resnick, L. B. (1988). Treating mathematics as an ill-structured discipline. In R. I. Charles & A. E. Silver (Eds.), The

teaching and assessing of mathematical problem solving (pp. 32

–60). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Resnick, L. B., & Omanson, S. F. (1987). Learning to understand arithmetic. In R. Glaser (Ed.), Advances in

instructional psychology (Vol 3, pp. 41

–95). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Resnick, L. B., & Resnick, D. P. (1992). Assessing the thinking curriculum: New tools for education reform. In B. R.

Gifford &
M. C. O

‘Connor (Eds.), Changing assessments: Alternative

620

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in620 620

10/17/08 10:05:38 AM

REFERENCES

views of aptitude, achievement, and instruction (pp. 37

–75). Boston: Kluwer Academic.

Rest, J. R., Thomas, S. J., & Edwards, L. (1997). Designing and validating a measure of moral judgment: Stage

preference and stage consistency approaches. Journal of Educational Psychology, 89, 5

–28.

Reyna, C. (2000). Lazy, dumb, or industrious: When stereotypes convey attribution information in the classroom.

Educational Psychology Review, 12, 85

–110.

Reyna, C., & Weiner, B. (2001). Justice and utility in the classroom: An attributional analysis of the goals of teachers

‘

punishment and intervention strategies. Journal of Educational Psychology, 93, 309

–319.

Reynolds, C. R., Chastain, R. L., Kaufman, A. S., & McLean, J. E.

(1987). Demographic characteristics and IQ among adults: Analysis of the WAIS-R standardization sample
as a function of the strati

ﬁcation variables. Journal of School Psychology, 25, 323–342.

Reynolds, C. R., Livingston, R. B., & Willson, V. (2006). Measurement and assessment in education. Boston:

Pearson.

Rhode, G., Jensen, W. R., & Reavis, H. K. (1992). The tough kid book: Practical classroom management strategies.

Longmont, CO: Sopris West.

Rhodewalt, F. (1994). Conceptions of ability, achievement goals, and individual differences in self-handicapping

behavior: On the application of implicit theories. Journal of Personality, 62, 67

–85.

Rholes, W., Blackwell, J., Jordan, C., & Walters, C. (1980). A developmental study of learned helplessness.

Developmental Psychology, 16, 616

–624.

Rich, L. E. (2004). Bringing more effective tools to the weight-loss table. Monitor on Psychology, 4(1), 52

–55.

Richards, J. (2006) Setting the stage for student engagement.

Kappa Delta Pi Record, 42, 92

–94.

Richardson, T. M., & Benbow, C. P. (1990). Long-term effects of acceleration on the social-emotional adjustment of

mathematically precocious youths. Journal of Educational Psychology, 82(3), 464

–470.

Ridgway, A., Northup, J., Pellegrin, A., LaRue, R., & Hightshoe,

A. (2003). Effects of recess on the classroom behavior of children with and without attention-de

ﬁcit hyperactivity

disorder. School Psychology Quarterly, 18, 253

–268.

Rincon, E. (1980). Test speededness, test anxiety, and test performance: A comparison of Mexican American

and Anglo American high school juniors (Doctoral dissertation, University of Texas at Austin). Dissertation
Abstracts International, 40, 5772A.

Risch, N. L., & Kiewra, K. A. (1990). Content and form variations in note taking: Effects among junior high students.

Journal of Educational Research, 83, 355

–357.

Rist, R. (1970). Student social class and teacher expectations:

The self-ful

ﬁlling prophecy in ghetto education. Harvard Educational Review, 40, 411–451.

Ritchie, W. C., & Bhatia, T. K. (Eds.). (1999). Handbook of child language acquisition. Orlando, FL: Academic

Press.

Ritter, K. (1978). The development of knowledge of an external retrieval cue strategy. Child Development, 49,

1227

–1230.

Rivers, R. H., & Vockell, E. (1987). Computer simulations to stimulate scienti

ﬁc problem solving. Journal of

Research in Science Teaching, 25(4), 403

–415.

Robertson, J. (2000). Is attributional training a worthwhile classroom intervention for K

–12 students with

learning dif

ﬁculties? Educational Psychology Review, 12, 111–134.

Robinson, A. (1990). Point

–counterpoint: Cooperation or exploitation? The argument against cooperative

learning for talented students. Journal for the Education of the Gifted, 14, 9

–27.

Robinson, A., & Clinkenbeard, P. R. (1998). Giftedness: An exceptionality examined. In J. T. Spence, J. M. Darley,

& D. J. Foss (Eds.), Annual review of psychology (pp. 117

–139). Palo Alto, CA: Annual Reviews.

Robinson, C., Menchetti, B., & Torgesen, J. (2002). Toward a two-factor theory of one type of mathematics

disabilities. Learning Disabilities Research & Practice, 17, 81

–89.

Robinson, D. H. (1998). Graphic organizers as aids to test learning. Reading Research and Instruction, 37, 85

–105.

Robinson, D. H., Funk, D. C., Beth, A., & Bush, A. M. (2005).

Changing beliefs about corporal punishment: Increasing knowledge about ineffectiveness to build more
consistent moral and informational beliefs. Journal of Behavioral Education, 14, 117

–139.

Robinson, N. M. (2000). Giftedness in very young children:

How seriously should it be taken? In R. C. Friedman & B.
M. Shore (Eds.), Talents unfolding: Cognition and development (pp. 7

–26). Washington, DC:

American Psychological Association.

Robinson, R. P. (1961). Effective study. New York: Harper & Row.
Roe, A. (1952). The making of a scientist. New York: Dodd, Mead.
Roedel, T. D., & Shaw, G. (1995). Beliefs about intelligence and academic goals. Contemporary Educational

Psycholgogy, 20, 464

–468.

Roedigger, H. (1997). Memory: Explicit and implicit. Paper presented at the Symposium, Recent Advances in

Research on Human Memory, National Academy of Sciences, Washington, DC.

Roeser, R., Eccles, J., & Sameroff, A. (1998). Academic and emotional functioning in early

adolescence: Longitudinal relations, patterns, and predictions by experience in middle school. Development and
Psychopathology, 10, 321

–352.

Roeser, R., Eccles, J., & Sameroff, A. (2000). School as a context of early adolescents

‘ academic and

social-emotional development: A summary of research

ﬁndings. Elementary School Journal, 100, 443–471.

Rogers, K. B. (1991). The relationship of grouping practices to the education of the gifted and talented learner.

Storrs, CT: National Research Center on the Gifted and Talented.

Rogers, K. B. (1993). Grouping the gifted and talented: Questions and answers. Roeper Review, 16, 8

–12.

Rogers, K. B. (2002). Grouping the gifted and talented. Roeper

Review, 24, 103

–108.

references

621

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in621 621

10/17/08 10:05:40 AM

REFERENCES

Rogers, S. J. (1996). Brief report: Early intervention in autism. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders,

26(2), 243

–246.

Rogoff, B. (1990). Apprenticeship in thinking. New York: Oxford

University Press.

Rogoff, B. (2001). Everyday cognition: Its development in social context. New York: Replica Books.
Rogoff, B. (2003). The cultural nature of human development.

New York: Oxford University Press.

Rogoff, B., & Chavajay, P. (1995). What

‘s become of research on the cultural basis of cognitive development?

American Psychologist, 50, 859

–877.

Roid, G. (2003). Stanford-Binet intelligence scales (5th ed.).

Itasca, IL: Riverside.

Rollins, P. (2003). Caregivers

‘ contingent comments to 9-month-old infants: Relationship with later language.

Applied Psycholinguistics, 24, 221

–234.

Rose, A. J., Swenson, L. P., & Carlson, W. (2004). Friendships of aggressive youth: Considering the

ﬂuences of being disliked and of being perceived as popular. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 88,

–45.

Rose, L. C., & Gallup, A. M. (1999). The 31st annual Phi Delta

Kappa/Gallup Poll of the public

‘s attitude toward public schools. Phi Delta Kappan, 81(1), 41–58.

Rose, M. (1989). Lives on the boundary: The struggles and achievements of America

’s

underprepared. New York: Free Press.

Rosenbaum, J. E. (1980). Social implications of educational grouping. Review of Research in Education,

8, 361

–401.

Rosenberg, M., Schooler, C., Schoenbach, C., & Rosenberg, F.

(1995). Global self-esteem and speci

ﬁc self–esteem: Different concepts, different outcomes. American Sociological

Review, 60, 141

–156.

Rosen

ﬁeld, P., Lambert, N., & Black, A. (1985). Desk arrangement effects on pupil classroom behavior. Journal of

Educational Research, 77(1), 101

–108.

Rosenholtz, S. J., & Simpson, C. (1984). The formation of ability conceptions: Developmental trend or social

construction? Review of Educational Research, 54(1), 31

–63.

Rosenshine, B. (1971). Teaching behaviours and student achievement. London: National Foundation for

Educational Research.

Rosenshine, B. (1979). Content, time, and direct instruction. In

P. Peterson & H. Wahlberg (Eds.), Research on teaching: Concepts,

ﬁndings, and implications (pp. 28–56).

Berkeley, CA: McCutchan.

Rosenshine, B. (1983). Teaching functions in instructional programs. Elementary School Journal, 83(4), 335

–350.

Rosenshine, B. (1985). Direct instruction. In T. Husen & T. N.

Postlethwaite (Eds.), International Encyclopedia of Education (Vol. 3, pp. 1395

–1400). Oxford, UK: Pergamon

Press.

Rosenshine, B. (1988). Explicit teaching. In D. Berliner & B. Rosenshine (Eds.), Talks to teachers (pp. 75

–92). New

York: Random House.

Rosenshine, B., & Meister, C. (1994). Reciprocal teaching: A review of the research. Review of Educational

Research, 64(4), 479

–530.

Rosenshine, B., & Stevens, R. (1986). Teaching functions. In

M. Wittrock (Ed.), Handbook of research on teaching (3rd ed., pp. 376

–391). New York: Macmillan.

Rosenthal, R. (1995). Critiquing Pygmalion: A 25-year perspective. Current Directions in Psychological Science, 4,

171

–172.

Rosenweig, M. R. (1969). Effects of heredity and environment on brain chemistry, brain anatomy, and learning ability

in the rat. In M. Monosevitz, G. Lindzey, & D. D. Thiessen (Eds.), Behavioral genetics. New York:
Appleton-Century-Crofts.

Ross, B. H. (1987). This is like that: The use of earlier problems and the separation of similarity effects. Journal of

Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory, and Cognition, 13, 629

–639.

Ross, B. H. (1989). Distinguishing types of super

ﬁcial similarities: Different effects on the access and use of earlier

problems. Journal of Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory, and Cognition, 15, 456

–468.

Ross, D. M., & Ross, S. A. (1982). Hyperactivity: Current issues, research, and theory. New York: Wiley.
Rotenberg, K. J., & Mayer, E. V. (1990). Delay of grati

ﬁcation in

Native and White children: A cross-cultural comparison. International Journal of Behavioral Development, 13,
23

–30.

Roth, G., Assor, A., Kanat-Maymon, Y., & Kaplan, H. (2007).

Autonomous motivation for teaching: How self-determined teaching may lead to self-determined learning.
Journal of Educational Psychology, 99(4), 761

–774.

Rothbart, M. K., Ellis, L. K., & Posner, M. I. (2004). Temperament and self-regulation. In R. F. Baumeister & K. D.

Vohs (Eds.), Handbook of self-regulation. New York: Guilford Press.

Rothbaum, F., Weisz, J., Pott, M., Miyake, K., Morelli, G. (2000).

Attachment and culture: Security in the United States and Japan. American Psychologist, 55, 1093

–1104.

Rotter, J. (1966). Generalized expectancies for internal versus external control of reinforcement.

Psychological Monographs, 1 (Whole No. 609).

Rotter, J. (1990). Internal versus external control of reinforcement: A case history of a variable. American

Psychologist, 45, 489

–493.

Rowan, B., & Miracle, A. W. Jr. (1983). Systems of ability grouping and the strati

ﬁcation of achievement in

elementary schools. Sociology of Education, 56, 133

–144.

Rowe, M. B. (1987). Wait time: Slowing down may be a way of speeding up. American Educator, 11(1), 38

–44, 47.

Rowe, S. M., & Wertsch, J. V. (2002). Vygotsky

‘s model of cognitive development. In U. Goswami (Ed.), Blackwell

handbook of childhood cognitive development (pp. 538

–554). Malden, MA: Blackwell.

Royer, J. M. (1997). A cognitive perspective on the assessment, diagnosis, and remediation of reading skills. In G.

Phye (Ed.), Handbook of academic learning (pp. 199

–234). New York: Academic Press.

Royer, J. M., & Sinatra, G. M. (1994). A cognitive theoretical approach to reading diagnostics. Educational

Psychology Review, 6(2), 81

–113.

Royer, J. M., & Tronsky, L. N. (1998). Addition practice with math disabled students improves subtraction and

multiplica-

622

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in622 622

10/17/08 10:05:42 AM

REFERENCES

tion performance. Advances in Learning and Behavioral Disabilities, 12, 185

–217.

Rudner, L. M., & Schafer, W. D. (Eds.). (2002). What teachers need to know about assessment. Washington, DC:

National Education Association.

Runco, M. A. (Ed.). (1996). Creativity from childhood through adulthood: The developmental issues. San Francisco:

Jossey-Bass.

Runco, M. A., & Nemiro, J. (1994). Problem

ﬁnding, creativity, and giftedness. Roeper Review, 16, 235–241.

Russell, R. L., & Ginsburg, H. P. (1984). Cognitive analysis of children

‘s mathematical difﬁculties. Cognition and

Instruction, 1, 217

–244.

Rutter, M. (1978). Diagnosis and de

ﬁnition. In M. Rutter &

E. Schloper (Eds.), Autism: A reappraisal of concepts and treatment (pp. 1

–26). New York: Plenum.

Ryan, A., Gheen, M., and Midgley, C. (1998). Why do some students avoid asking for help? An examination of the

interplay among students

‘ academic efﬁcacy, teachers‘ social-emotional role, and the classroom goal

structure. Journal of Educational Psychology, 90, 528

–535.

Ryan, A. M., & Patrick, H. (2001). The classroom social environment and changes in adolescents

‘ motivation and

engagement during middle school. American Educational Research Journal, 38, 437

–460.

Ryan, R. M. (1995). Psychological needs and the facilitation of integrative processes. Journal of Personality, 63,

397

–427.

Ryan, R. M., Connell, J. P., & Deci, E. L. (1985). A motivational analysis of self-determination and self-regulation in

education. In C. Ames & R. Ames (Eds.), Research on motivation in education (Vol. 2, pp. 13

–51). San Diego, CA:

Academic Press.

Ryan, R. M., & Deci, E. L. (2000a). Self-determination theory and the facilitation of intrinsic motivation, social

development and well-being. American Psychologist, 55, 68

–78.

Ryan, R. M., & Deci, E. L. (2000b). Intrinsic and extrinsic motivation: Classic de

ﬁnitions and new directions.

Contemporary Educational Psychology, 25, 54

–67.

Ryan, R. M., Deci, E. L., & Grolnick, W. S. (1995). Autonomy, relatedness, and the self: Their relation to

development and psychopathology. In D. Cicchetti & D. J. Cohen (Eds.), Developmental
psychopathology, Vol. I: Theory and methods (pp. 618

–655). New York: Wiley.

Ryan, R. M., & Grolnick, W. S. (1986). Origins and pawns in the classroom: Self-report and projective assessments

of individual differences in children

‘s perceptions. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 50, 550–558.

Ryan, R. M., Mims, V., & Koestner, R. (1983). Relation of reward contingency and interpersonal context to intrinsic

motivation: A review and test using cognitive evaluation theory. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 45,
736

–750.

Ryan, R. M., & Stiller, J. (1991). The social contexts of internalization: Parent and teacher in

ﬂuences on autonomy,

motivation, and learning. In M. L. Maehr & P. L. Pintrich (Eds.), Advances in motivation and achievement (Vol. 7,
pp. 115

–149). Greenwich, CT: JAI Press.

Saarni, C. (1984). An observational study of children

‘s attempts to monitor their expressive behavior. Child

Development, 55, 1504

–1513.

Sabatelli, R. M., & Mazor, A. (1985). Differentiation, individuation, and identity formation: The integration of family

system and individual developmental perspectives. Adolescence, 20, 619

–633.

Sabers, D. S., Cushing, K. S., & Berliner, D. C. (1991). Differences among teachers in a task characterized by

simultaneity, multidimensionality, and immediacy. American Educational Research Journal, 28(1), 63

–88.

Sachs, J. (1989). Communication development in infancy. In

J. Berko Gleason (Ed.), The development of language (pp. 39

–

61). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Merrill/Prentice Hall.

Sadker, M., Sadker, D., & Klein, S. (1991). The issue of gender in elementary and secondary education. In G. Grant

(Ed.), Review of research in education (pp. 269

–334). Washington, DC: American Educational Research

Association.

Sadoski, M., & Paivio, A. (2001). Imagery and text: A dual coding theory of reading and writing. Mahwah, NJ:

Erlbaum.

Saffran, E. M., & Schwartz, M. F. (2003). Language. In M. Gallagher & R. J. Nelson (Eds.), Handbook of

psychology: Vol. 3. Biological psychology (pp. 595

–627). Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.

Salend, D., & Sonnenschein, P. (1989). Validating the effectiveness of a cooperative learning strategy through

direct observation. Journal of School Psychology, 27(1), 47

–58.

Salomon, G., & Globerson, T. (1987). Skill may not be enough:

The role of mindfulness in learning and transfer. International Journal of Educational Research, 11, 623

–637.

Salomon, G., & Perkins, D. (1989). Rocky roads to transfer: Re-thinking mechanisms of a neglected phenomenon.

Educational Psychologist, 18, 42

–50.

Salovey, P., & Mayer, J. D. (1990). Emotional intelligence. Imagination, Cognition, and Personality, 9, 185

–211.

Sanders, J. R., Hills, J. R., Nitko, A. J., Merwin, J. C., Trice, C.,

Dianda, M., & Schneider, J. (1990). Standards for teacher competence in educational assessment of
students. Educational Measurement: Issues and Practices, 9, 30

–31.

Santiago, R. (1994). The interdependence between linguistic and cognitive performance among bilingual

preschoolers with differing home language environments. In D. MacLaughlin & S. McEwen (Eds.), Proceedings of
Boston University Conference on Language Development, 19, 511

–520. Somerville, MA: Cascadilla Press.

Sapp, M. (1999). Test anxiety: Applied research, assessment, and treatment interventions (2nd ed.). New York:

University Press of America.

Sarnacki, R. E. (1979). An examination of test-wiseness in the cognitive test domain. Review of Educational

Research, 49, 252

–279.

Saunders, W., & Goldenberg, C. (1992, April). Instructional conversations on transition students

’ concepts of

―friendship‖: An experimental study. Paper presented at the Annual Meeting of the American Educational Research
Association, San Francisco.

references

623

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in623 623

10/17/08 10:05:44 AM

REFERENCES

Saunders, W., & Goldenberg, C. (1999). The effects of instructional conversations and literature logs on limited- and

ﬂuent-English-proﬁcient students‘ story comprehension and thematic understanding. Elementary School
Journal, 99(4), 277

–301.

Saxe, G. B. (2002). Candy selling and math learning. In C. Des-forges & R. Fox (Eds.), Teaching and learning: The

essential readings (pp. 86

–106). Malden, MA: Blackwell.

Scardamalia, M., & Bereiter, C. (1985). Fostering the development of self-regulation in children

‘s knowledge

processing. In S. F. Chipman, J. W. Segal, & R. Glaser (Eds.), Thinking and learning skills: Research and
open questions (pp. 563

–577). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Scardamalia, M., & Bereiter, C. (1986). Research on written composition. In M. C. Wittrock (Ed.),

Handbook of research on teaching (3rd ed., pp. 778

–803). New York: Macmillan.

Scardamalia, M., Bereiter, C., & Goelman, H. (1982). The role of production factors in writing ability. In M. Nystrand

(Ed.), What writers know (pp. 173

–210). New York: Academic Press.

Scardamalia, M., Bereiter, C., & Steinbach, R. (1984). Teachability of re

ﬂective processes in written composition.

Cognitive Science, 8, 173

–190.

Scarr, S. (1998). American child care today. American Psychologist, 53, 95

–108.

Schachar, H. (2003). Who gains what from cooperative learning:

An overview of eight studies. In R. Gillies & A. Ashman (Eds.), Cooperative learning: The social and intellectual
outcomes of learning in groups (pp. 103

–118). London: Routledge/Falmer.

Schachar, R., & Tannock, R. (2002). Syndromes of hyperactivity and attention de

ﬁcit. In M. Rutter & E. Taylor

(Eds.), Child and adolescent psychiatry (4th ed., pp. 399

–418). Maiden, MA: Blackwell Science.

Scherer, N., & Olswang, L. (1984). Role of mothers

‘ expansions in stimulating children‘s language production.

Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, 27, 387

–396.

Schewel, R. H., & Waddell, J. G. (1986). Metacognitive skills:

Practical strategies. Academic Therapy, 22, 19

–25.

Schickedanz, J., York, M., Stewart, I., & White, D. (1990). Strategies for teaching young children. Upper Saddle

River, NY: Prentice Hall.

Schiefele, U. (1991). Interest, learning, and motivation. Educational Psychologist, 26, 299

–323.

Schieffelin, F., & Ochs, E. (1986). Language socialization. Annual

Review of Anthropology, 15, 163

–246.

Schirrmacher, R. (2006). Art and creative development for young children (5th ed.). Clifton Park, NY: Thomson.
Schliemann, A. D., & Acioly, N. M. (1989). Mathematical knowledge developed at work: The contribution of practice

versus the contribution of schooling. Cognition and Instruction, 6, 185

–221.

Schloss, P. J., & Smith, M. A. (1994). Applied behavior analysis in the classroom. Boston: Allyn & Bacon.
Schmidt, W. H., McKnight, C. C., & Raizen, S. A. (1996). Executive summary: A splintered vision: An investigation

of U.S. science and mathematics education. www.coled.org/smcnws/ timss/splintrd.html.

Schneider, B. A., Trehub, S. E., & Bull, D. (1979). The development of basic auditory processes in infants.

Canadian Journal of Psychology, 33, 306

–319.

Schneider, W. (1985). Training high

–performance skills: Fallacies and guidelines. Human Factors, 27(3), 285–300.

Schneider, W., & Shiffrin, R. M. (1985). Categorization (restructuring) and automatization: Two separable factors.

Psychological Review 92(3), 424

–428.

Scholz, U., Dona, B. G., Sud, S., & Schwarzer, R. (2002). Is general self-ef

ﬁcacy a universal construct?

Psychometric

ﬁndings from 25 countries. European Journal of Psychological Assessment, 18(3), 242–251.

Schunk, D. (1989). Self-ef

ﬁcacy and cognitive skill learning. In

C. Ames & R. Ames (Eds.), Research on motivation in education: Goals and cognitions, Vol. 3 (pp. 13

–44). San

Diego, CA: Academic Press.

Schunk, D. (2001). Social cognitive theory and self-regulated learning. In B. J. Zimmerman & D. H. Schunk

(Eds.), Self-regulated learning and academic achievement: Theoretical perspectives (2nd ed., pp. 125

–152).

Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum. Schunk, D. (2003). Self-ef

ﬁcacy for reading and writing: Inﬂuence of modeling, goal setting,

and self-evaluation. Reading and Writing Quarterly, 19, 159

–172.

Schunk, D., & Hanson, A. (1985). Peer models: In

ﬂuence on children‘s self-efﬁcacy and achievement. Journal of

Educational Psychology, 77, 313

–322.

Schunk, D., & Hanson, A. R. (1989). Self-modeling and children

‘s cognitive skill learning. Journal of Educational

Psychology, 81, 155

–163.

Schunk, D., & Zimmerman, B. (1997). Social origins of self-regulatory competence. Educational

Psychologist, 32, 195

–208. Schunk, D., & Zimmerman, B. (2007). Inﬂuencing children‘s self-efﬁcacy and

self-regulation of reading and writing through modeling. Reading and Writing Quarterly, 23, 7

–25.

Schunk, D. H. (1981). Modeling and attributional feedback effects on children

‘s achievement: A self-efﬁcacy analysis.

Journal of Educational Psychology, 74, 93

–105.

Schunk, D. H. (1987). Peer models and children

‘s behavioral change. Review of Educational Research,

57, 149

–174.

Schunk, D. H. (2000). Learning theories (3rd ed.). Upper Saddle

River, NJ: Merrill/Prentice Hall.

Schunk, D. H. (2004). Learning theories: An educational perspective (4th ed.), Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson.
Schunk, D. H., & Miller, S. D. (2002). Self-ef

ﬁcacy and adolescents‘ motivation. In F. Pajares & T. Urdan (Eds.),

Academic motivation of adolescents (pp. 29

–52). Greenwich, CT: Information Age.

Schunk, D. H., & Pajares, F. (2002). The development of academic self-ef

ﬁcacy. In A. Wigﬁeld &J. Eccles (Eds.),

Development of achievement motivation (pp. 15

–31). San Diego, CA: Academic Press.

Schwalbe, M. L., & Staples, C. L. (1991). Gender differences in sources of self-esteem. Social

Psychology Quarterly, 54, 158

–168.

Scott, L. (2007). The child who stutters at school: Notes to the teacher. Retrieved September 21, 2007 from

Stuttering Foun-

624

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in624 624

10/17/08 10:05:46 AM

REFERENCES

dation of America, http://www.stutteringhelp.org/Portals/ english/0042NT.pdf.

Scruggs, T. E., & Mastropieri, M. A. (1994). Successful mainstreaming in elementary science classes: A qualitative

study of three reputational cases. American Educational Research Journal, 31, 785

–811.

Sedek, G., & Mclntosh, D. (1998). Intellectual helplessness: Domain speci

ﬁcity, teaching styles, and school

achievement. In
M. Kofta, G. Weary, & G. Sedek (Eds.), Personal control in action: Cognitive and motivational mechanisms (pp.
419

—443). New York: Plenum Press.

Segal, N. L. (1989). Origins and implications of handedness and relative birth weight for IQ in monozygotic twin

pairs. Neuropsychologia, 27, 549

–561.

Seijts, G. H., & Latham, G. P. (2001). The effect of learning, outcome, and proximal goals on a moderately

complex task. Journal of Organizational Behavior, 22, 291

–302.

Sejnowski, T. J., & Churchland, P. S. (1989). Brain and cognition. In M. I. Posner (Ed.), Foundations of cognitive

science (pp. 301

–358). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

Seligman, M. (1975). Helplessness: On depression, development, and death. San Francisco: W. H. Freeman.
Seligman, M., & Maier, S. (1967). Failure to escape traumatic shock. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 74, 1

–9.

Seligman, M. E. P. (1994). What you can change and what you can

’t. New York: Alfred A. Knopf.

Selman, R. L. (1971a). Conceptual role-taking development in early childhood. Proceedings of the Annual

Convention of the American Psychological Association, Vol. 6, pp. 155

–156.

Selman, R. L. (1971b). The relation of role taking to the development of moral judgment in children. Child

Development, 42, 79

–91.

Serna, L., Lambros, K. M., Nielsen, E., & Forness, S. R. (2002).

Head Start children at risk for emotional or behavioral disorders: Behavioral pro

ﬁles and clinical implications of a

primary prevention program. Behavioral Disorders, 27, 137

–141.

Serna, L., Nielsen, E., Mattern, N., & Forness, S. R. (2003). Primary mental health prevention in Head Start

classrooms: Partial replication with teachers as intervenors. Behavioral Disorders, 23, 124

–129.

Serrano, R., & Howard, E. R. (2003). Maintaining Spanish pro

ﬁciency in the United States. In L. Sayahi (Ed.),

Selected proceedings of the

ﬁrst workshop on Spanish sociolinguistics (pp. 77–88). Somerville, MA:

Cascadilla Proceedings Project.

Shabani, D. B., Katz, R. C., Wilder, D. A., Beauchamp, K., Taylor, C. R., & Fischer, K. J. (2002). Increasing social

initiations in children with autism: Effects of a tactile prompt. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 35, 79

–83.

Shaffer, D. R. (2000). Social and personality development

(4th ed.). Belmont, CA: Wadsworth.

Shatz, M. (1994). A toddler

’s life: Becoming a person. New York:

Oxford University Press.

Shavelson, R. J., & Baxter, G. P. (1991). Performance assessment in science. Applied Measurement in Education,

4, 347

–362.

Shavelson, R. J., Berliner, D. C., Ravitch, M. M., & Loeding, D.

(1974). Effects of position and type of question on learning
from prose material: Interaction of treatments with individual differences. Journal of Educational
Psychology, 66, 40

–48.

Shaw, T. J. (1983). The effect of a process-oriented science curriculum upon problem solving ability. Science

Education, 67, 615

–623.

Shaywitz, B. A., Shaywitz, S. E., Blachman, B. A., Pugh, K. R.,
Fulbright, R. K., Skudlarski, P., Menci, W. E., Constable, R. T., Holahan, J. M., Marchione, K. E., Fletcher, J. M.,
Lyon, G. R., & Gore, J. C. (2004). Development of left occipitotemporal systems for skilled reading in children after a
phonologically-based intervention. Biological Psychiatry, 55(9), 926

–933. Shaywitz, B. A., Shaywitz, S. E., Pugh, K.

R., Menci, W. E., Fulbright, R. K., Skudlarski, P., Constable, R. T., Marchione, K. E., Fletcher, J. M., Lyon, G.
R., & Gore, J. C. (2002). Disruption of posterior brain systems for reading in children with developmental dyslexia.
Biological Psychiatry, 52(2), 101

–110.

Shek, D. T. L. (2005). Paternal and maternal in

ﬂuences on the psychological well-being, substance abuse, and

delinquency of Chinese adolescents experiencing economic disadvantage. Journal of Clinical Psychology, 61(3),
219

–234.

Shepard, L. A. (2000). The role of assessment in a learning culture. Educational Researcher, 29(7), 4

–14.

Shepard, L. A. (2006). Classroom assessment. In R. L. Brennan (Ed.), Educational measurement (4th ed.).

Westport, CT: American Council on Education and Praeger Publishers. Sheridan, S. M., Hungelmann, A., &
Maughan, D. P. (1999). A contextualized framework for social skills assessment, intervention, and generalization.
School Psychology Review, 28, 84

–103.

Shields, C. (1995). A comparison study of student attitudes and perceptions in homogeneous and heterogeneous

classrooms. Roeper Review, 17, 234

–238.

Shimamura, A. P. (1994). The neuropsychology of metacognition. In J. Metcalfe & A. P. Shimamura (Eds.),

Metacognition: Knowing about knowing (pp. 253

–276). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

Shimamura, A. P. (1995). Memory and frontal lobe function.

In M. S. Gazzaniga (Ed.), The cognitive neurosciences (pp. 803

–813). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

Shore, R. (1997). Rethinking the brain: New insights into early development. New York: families and Work Institute.

Sieber, J., O

‘Neil, H., & Tobias, S. (1977). Anxiety, learning, and instruction. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Sieber, R. T. (1979). Classmates as workmates: Informal peer activity in the elementary school. Anthropology and

Education Quarterly, 10, 207

–235.

Siegel, L. S. (1992). An evaluation of the discrepancy de

ﬁnition of dyslexia. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 25(10),

618

–629. Siegler, R. S., & Alibali, M. W. (2005). Children’s thinking

(4th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Prentice Hall. Simmon, R. G. (1987). Self-esteem in adolescence. In T.

Honess

& K. Yardley (Eds.), Self and identity: Perspectives across the lifespan. New York: Routledge & Kegan Paul.

Simonton, D. K. (2000). Creativity: Cognitive, personal, developmental, and social aspects. American

Psychologist, 55, 151

–158.

references

625

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in625 625

10/17/08 10:05:48 AM

REFERENCES

Simos, P. G., Fletcher, J. M., Bergman, E., Breier, J. I., Foorman,

B. R., Castillo, E. M., Davus, R. N., Fitzgerald, M., & Papanicolaou, A. C. (2002). Dyslexia-speci

ﬁc brain

activation pro

ﬁle becomes normal following successful remedial training. Neurology, 58(8), 1203–1213.

Singley, M. K., & Anderson, J. R. (1989). The transfer of cognitive skill. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

Sisk, D. A. (1988). Children at risk: The identi

ﬁcation of the gifted among the minority. Gifted Education

International, 5, 138

–141.

Skinner, B. F. (1953). Science and human behavior. New York:

Macmillan.

Skinner, B. F. (1954). The science of learning and the art of teaching. Harvard Education Review, 14, 86

–97.

Skinner, B. F. (1957). Verbal behavior. Upper Saddle River, NJ:

Prentice

–Hall.

Skinner, E. A., & Belmont, M. J. (1993). Motivation in the classroom: Reciprocal effects of teacher behavior

and student engagement across the school year. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85(4), 571

–581.

Slakter, M. J., Koehler, R. A., & Hampton, S. H. (1970). Grade level, sex, and selected aspects of test-wiseness.

Journal of Educational Measurement, 7, 119

–122.

Slavin, R. E. (1978). Student teams and achievement divisions.

Journal of Research and

Development in Education, 12, 39

–49.

Slavin, R. E. (1980). Cooperative learning. Review of Educational

Research, 50(2), 315

–342.

Slavin, R. E. (1986). Using student team learning (3rd ed.). Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University, Center for

Research on Elementary and Middle Schools.

Slavin, R. E. (1987a). Ability grouping and student achievement in elementary schools: A best-evidence synthesis.

Review of Educational Research, 57(3), 293

–336.

Slavin, R. E. (1987b). Grouping for instruction in elementary school. Educational Psychologist, 22(2), 109

–127.

Slavin, R. E. (1988). Cooperative learning and student achievement. Educational Leadership, 46(2), 31

–33.

Slavin, R. E. (1990). Achievement effects of ability grouping in secondary schools: A best-evidence synthesis.

Review of Educational Research, 60, 471

–499.

Slavin, R. E. (1990). Mastery learning re-reconsidered. Review of

Educational Research, 60(2), 300

–302.

Slavin, R. E. (1991). Synthesis of research on cooperative learning. Educational Leadership, 48(5), 71

–82.

Slavin, R. E., Leavey, M., & Madden, N. A. (1984). Combining cooperative learning and individualized instruction:

Effects on student mathematics achievement, attitudes and behaviors. Elementary School Journal, 84, 409

–422.

Slavin, R. E., & Madden, N. (1989). What works for students at risk: A research synthesis. Educational Leadership,

46(5), 4

–13.

Slavin, R. E., Madden, N. A., & Stevens, R. J. (1990). Cooperative learning models for the 3 R

‘s. Educational

Leadership, 47(4), 22

–28.

Smith, D. D. (2006). Introduction to special education: Teaching in an age of opportunity (5th ed.). Boston: Allyn &

Bacon.

Smith, J. K. (2003). Reconsidering reliability in classroom assessment and training for teachers. Educational

Measurement: Issues and Practice, 22(4), 26

–33.

Smith, K., Johnson, D. W., & Johnson, R. (1982). Effects of cooperative and individualistic instruction on the

achievement of handicapped, regular, and gifted students. Journal of Social Psychology, 116, 277

–283.

Smith, L. (1993). Necessary knowledge: Piagetian perspectives on constructivism. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Smith, L. (2002). Piaget

‘s model. In U. Goswami (Ed.), Blackwell handbook of childhood cognitive development (pp.

515

–537). Malden, MA: Blackwell.

Smith, N. B., & Robinson, H. A. (1980). Reading instruction for today

’s children. New York: Prentice Hall.

Smith, S., Lochman, J. E., & Daunic, A. P. (2005). Managing aggression using cognitive-behavioral interventions:

State of the practice and future directions. Behavioral Disorders, 30, 227

–240.

Smolucha, L., & Smolucha, F. (1998). The social origins of mind:

Post-Piagetian perspectives on pretend play. In O. N. S. B. Saracho (Ed.), Multiple perspectives on play in early
childhood education (pp. 34

–58). SUNY series Early childhood education: Inquiries and insights. Albany, NY: State

University of New York Press.

Snow, C. E. (1986). Conversations with children. In P. Fletcher &

M. Garman (Eds.), Language acquisition: Studies in

ﬁrst language development (pp. 69–89). Cambridge, UK:

Cambridge University Press.

Snow, C. E., & Gold

ﬁeld, B. A. (1983). Turn the page please: Situation-speciﬁc language learning. Journal of Child

Language, 10, 551

–569.

Soenens, B., & Vansteenkiste, M. (2005). Antecedents and outcomes of self-determination in three life domains:

The role of parents

‘ and teachers‘ autonomy support. Journal of Youth and Adolescence, 34, 589–604.

Solomon, D., & Kendall, A. J. (1976). Individual characteristics and children

‘s performance in ―open‖ and

―traditional‖ classroom settings. Journal of Educational Psychology, 65, 613–625.

Solomon, D., Watson, M. S., & Battistich, V. A. (2001). Teaching and schooling effects on moral/prosocial

development. In V. Richardson (Ed.), Handbook of research on teaching (4th ed., pp. 566

–603). Washington,

DC: American Educational Research Association.

Soodak, L. C. (2003). Classroom management in inclusive settings. Theory into Practice, 42(4), 327

–333.

Sowell, E. R., Peterson, B. S., Thompson, P. M., Welcome,

S. E., Henkenius, A. L., & Toga, A. W. (2003). Mapping cortical change across the human lifespan. Nature
Neuroscience, 6(3), 309

–315.

Sowell, E. R., Thompson, P. M., Holmes, C. J., et al. (1999). In vivo evidence for post-adolescent brain maturation

in frontal and striatal regions. Nature Neuroscience, 2(10), 859

–861.

Sowell, E. R., Thompson, P. M., Leonard, C. M., Welcome, S. E.,

Kan, E., & Toga, A. W. (2004). Longitudinal mapping of corti-

626

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in626 626

10/17/08 10:05:50 AM

REFERENCES

cal thickness and brain growth in normal children. Journal of Neuroscience, 24(38), 8223

–8231.

Sparrow, S. S., Balla, D. A., & Cicchetti, D. V. (1984). Vineland

Adaptive Behavior Scales. Circle Pines, MN: American Guidance Service.

Spearman, C. E. (1904). General intelligence objectively determined and measured. American Journal of

Psychology, 15, 201

–293.

Spearman, C. E. (1927). The nature of

―intelligence‖ and the principles of cognition (2nd ed.). London: Macmillan.

Speicher, B. (1994). Family patterns of moral judgment during adolescence and early adulthood. Developmental

Psychology, 30, 624

–632.

Spelke, E. S., & Newport, E. L. (1998). Nativism, empiricism, and the development of knowledge. In W. Damon

(Series Ed.) & D. Kuhn & R. S. Siegler (Vol. Eds.), Handbook of child psychology; Vol. 2. Cognition, perception,
and language (5th ed., pp. 275

–340). New York: Wiley.

Sperling, G. (1960). The information available in brief visual presentations. Psychological Monographs, 74 (11,

Whole No. 498).

Spiro, R., Feltovich, P. J., Jacobsen, M. J., & Coulson, R. L. (1991).

Cognitive

ﬂexibility, constructivism, and hypertext: Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition

in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31(5), 24

–33.

Spoth, R. L., Clair, S., Shin, C., & Redmond, C. ( 2006). Long-term effects of universal preventative interventions

on methamphetamine use among adolescents. Archives of Pediatric & Adolescent Medicine, 160, 876

–882.

Squibb, B., & Dietz, S. (2000). Learning activities for infants and toddlers: An easy guide for everyday use,

Washington, DC: Children

‘s Resources International.

Squire, L. R., & Alvarez, P. (1998). Retrograde amnesia and memory consolidation: A neurobiological

perspective. In L.
R. Squire & S. M. Kosslyn (Eds), Findings and current opinion in cognitive neuroscience (pp. 75

–84). Cambridge,

MA: MIT Press.

Stahl, S. (1998). Teaching children with reading problems to decode: Phonics and

―not-phonics‖ instruction.

Reading & Writing Quarterly: Overcoming Learning Dif

ﬁculties, 14(2), 165–188.

Stainback, S., & Stainback, W. (1996). Inclusion: A guide for educators. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes.
Stanovich, K. (2003). Understanding the styles of science in the study of reading. Scienti

ﬁc Studies of Reading, 7,

105

–126.

Stanovich, K. E. (1986). Matthew effects in reading: Some consequences of individual differences in the acquisition

of literacy. Reading Research Quarterly, 21(4), 360

–406.

Stanovich, K. E. (1988). Explaining the differences between the dyslexic and the garden-variety poor reader: The

phonological-core variable-difference model. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 21(10), 590

–604, 612.

Stanovich, K. E. (1990). Concepts in developmental theories of reading skill: Cognitive resources, automaticity, and

modularity. Developmental Review, 10, 72

–100.

Stanovich, K. E. (1991a). Conceptual and empirical problems with discrepancy de

ﬁnitions of reading

disability. Learning Disability Quarterly, 14, 269

–280.

Stanovich, K. E. (1991b). Discrepancy de

ﬁnitions of reading disability: Has intelligence led us astray? Reading

Research Quarterly, 26(1), 7

–29.

Stanovich, K. E. (1993). A model for studies of reading disability.

Developmental Review, 13, 225

–245.

Stanovich, K. E. (1998). Cognitive neuroscience and educational psychology: What season is it? Educational

Psychology Review, 10, 419

–426.

Stanovich, K. E., & Siegel, L. S. (1994). Phenotypic perfor -mance pro

ﬁle of children with reading

disabilities: A regression-based test of the phonological-core variable-difference model. Journal of Educational
Psychology, 86(1), 24

–53.

Stanovich, K. E., & West, R. E. (2000). Individual differences in reasoning: Implications for the rationality debate?

Behavior and Brain Sciences, 23, 646

–665.

Stecher, B., Barron, S., Chun, T., & Ross, K. (2000). The effects of the Washington state education reform

on schools and classrooms (CSE Technical Report 525). Los Angeles: National Center for Research on
Evaluation, Standards, and Student Testing.

Steele, C. M. (1997). A threat is in the air: How stereotypes shape intellectual identity and performance. American

Psychologist, 52, 613

–629.

Steele, C. M., & Aronson, J. (1998). Stereotype threat and the intellectual test performance of African Americans.

Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 69, 797

–811.

Steele, F. I. (1973). Physical settings and organization development. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.

Steffy, B. E., Wolfe, M. P., Pasch, S. H., & Enz, B. J. (2000). Life cycle of the career teacher. Thousand Oaks, CA:

Corwin Press.

Stein, M. A., Szumowski, E., Blondis, T. A., & Roizen, N. J. (1995).

Adaptive skills dysfunction in ADD and ADHD children. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 36, 663

–670.

Steinberg, L. S. (1996). Beyond the classroom: Why school reform has failed and what parents need to

do. New York: Simon & Schuster.

Steiner, H. H., & Carr, M. (2003). Cognitive development in gifted children: Toward a more

precise understanding of emerging differences in intelligence. Educational Psychology Review, 15(3), 215

–246.

Steinmetz, H., Herzog, A., Schlaug, G., Huang,Y., & Lanke, R.

(1995). Brain (a)symmetry in monozygotic twins. Cerebral Cortex, 5, 296

–300.

Sternberg, R. J. (1996a). Myths, countermyths, and truths about intelligence. Educational Researcher, 25(2), 11

–16.

Sternberg, R. J. (1996b). Successful intelligence: How practical and creative intelligence determine success in life.

New York: Simon & Schuster.

Sternberg, R. J. (1997). What does it mean to be smart? Educational Leadership, 54(6), 20

–24.

Sternberg, R. J. (1998). Principles of teaching for successful intelligence. Educational Psychologist, 33(2

–3), 65–72.

references

627

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in627 627

10/17/08 10:05:52 AM

REFERENCES

Sternberg, R. J. (1999). The theory of successful intelligence. Review of General Psychology, 3(4), 292

–316.

Sternberg, R. J. (2000). Identifying and developing creative giftedness. Roeper Review, 23, 60

–64.

Sternberg, R. J. (2002). Individual differences in cognitive development. In U. Goswami (Ed.), Blackwell handbook of

childhood cognitive development (pp. 600

–619). Malden, MA: Blackwell.

Sternberg, R. J. (2003). Contemporary theories of intelligence.

In W. M. Reynolds & G. E. Miller (Eds.), Handbook of psychology: Educational psychology (Vol. 7, pp. 23

–45).

Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.

Sternberg, R. J. (2003). Giftedness according to the theory of successful intelligence. In N. Colangelo & G. A. Davis

(Eds.), Handbook of gifted education (pp. 55

–60). Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

Sternberg, R. J. (2003). Intelligence. In D. K. Freedheim (Ed.),

Handbook of psychology: History of psychology (Vol. 1, pp. 135

–156). New York: Wiley.

Sternberg, R. J. (2004). Culture and intelligence. American Psychologist, 59(5), 325

–338.

Sternberg, R. J. (2005). Intelligence, race, and genetics. American Psychologist, 60(1), 46

–59.

Sternberg, R. J. (2006). Creating a vision of creativity: The

ﬁrst

25 years. Psychology of Aesthetics, Creativity, and the Arts, S (1), 2

–12.

Sternberg, R. J. (2007). Who are the bright children? The cultural context of being and acting intelligent. Educational

Researcher, 36(3), 148

–155.

Sternberg, R. J. (Ed.). (1990). Wisdom: Its nature, origins, and development. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University

Press.

Sternberg, R. J., & Clinkenbeard, P. (May-June 1995). A triarchic view of identifying, teaching, and assessing gifted

children. Roeper Review, 17(4), 255

–260.

Sternberg, R. J., Conway, B. E., Ketron, J. L., & Bernstein, M.

(1981). People

‘s conceptions of intelligence. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 41, 37–55.

Sternberg, R. J., Forsythe, G. B., Hedlund, J., Horvath, J. A.,

Wagner, R. K., Williams, W. N., Snook, S. A., & Grigorinko,
E. L. (2000). Practical intelligence in everyday life. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.

Sternberg, R. J., & Grigorenko, E. L. (2003). Teaching for successful intelligence: Principles, procedures, and

practices. Journal for the Education of the Gifted, 27(2

–3), 207–228.

Sternberg, R. J., Grigorenko, E. L., Ferrari, M., & Clinkenbeard, P.

(1999). A triarchic analysis of an aptitude-treatment interaction. European Journal of Psychological Assessment,
15(1), 1

–11.

Sternberg, R. J., & Kaufman, J. C. (1998). Human abilities. Annual Review of Psychology, 49, 479

–502.

Sternberg, R. J., & Lubart, T. I. (1995). Defying the crowd: Cultivating creativity in a culture of conformity. New York:

Free Press.

Sternberg, R. J., & Lubart, T. I. (1999). Investing in creativity.

American Psychologist, 51(7), 677

–688.

Sternberg, R. J., & O

’Hara, L. A. (1999). Creativity and intelligence. In R. J. Sternberg (Ed.), Handbook of

creativity (pp. 251

–272). Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.

Sternberg, R. J., & Williams, W. M. (1996). How to develop student creativity. Alexandria, VA: Association for

Supervision and Curriculum Development.

Sternberg, R. J. (Ed.). (1999). Handbook of creativity. Cambridge,

UK: Cambridge University Press.

Stetsenko, A., Little, T. D., Gordeeva, T., Granshof, M., & Oettingen, G. (2000). Gender effects in children

‘s

beliefs about school performance: A cross-cultural study. Child Development, 71, 517

–527.

Stevens, R. J., Madden, N. A., Slavin, R. E., & Farnish, A. M.

(1987). Cooperative integrated reading and composition: Two

ﬁeld experiments. Reading Research Quarterly, 22,

433

–454.

Stevens, R. J., & Slavin, R. E. (1995). The cooperative elementary school: Effects on students

‘ achievement,

attitudes, and social relations. American Educational Research Journal, 32, 321

–351.

Stevenson, H. W., Chen, C., & Uttal, D. H. (1990). Beliefs and achievement: A study of black, white, and Hispanic

children. Child Development, 61, 508

–523.

Stewart, S. C., Evans, W. H., & Kaczynski, D. J. (1997). Setting the stage for success: Assessing the instructional

environment. Preventing School Failure, 41, 53

–56.

Stiggins, R. J., Frisbie, D. A., & Griswold, P. A. (1989). Inside high school grading practices: Building a research

agenda. Educational Measurement: Issues and Practice, 8(2), 5

–14.

Stiggins, R., Rubel, E., & Quellmalz, E. (1986). Measuring thinking skills in the classroom. Washington, DC:

National Education Association.

Stiles, J., Bates, E. A., Thal, D., Trauner, D. A., & Reilly, J. (2002).

Linguistic and spatial cognitive development in children with pre- and peri-natal focal brain injury: A
ten-year overview from the San Diego Longitudinal Project. In M. H. Johnson,
Y. Munakata & R. O. Gilmore (Eds.), Brain development and cognition: A reader (2nd ed., pp. 272

–291). Oxford,

UK: Blackwell.

Stiles, J., & Thal, D. (1993). Linguistic and spatial cognitive development following early focal brain injury: Patterns

of de

ﬁcit and recovery. In M. H. Johnson (Ed.), Brain development and cognition: A reader (pp. 643–664). Oxford,

UK: Blackwell.

Stipek, D. (1984). The development of achievement motivation.

In R. Ames & C. Ames (Eds.), Research on motivation in education, Vol. 1 (pp. 145

–174). Orlando: Academic

Press.

Stipek, D. (2002). Motivation to learn: Integrating theory and practice (4th ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon.
Stipek, D., de la Sota, A., & Weishaupt, L. (1999). Life lessons:

An embedded classroom approach to preventing high-risk behaviors among preadolescents. Elementary School
Journal, 99(5), 433

–452.

Stipek, D., & Tannatt, L. (1984). Children

‘s judgments of their own and their peers‘ academic competence. Journal

of Educational Psychology, 76, 75

–84.

Stipek, D. J. (1996). Motivation and instruction. In D. C. Berliner

& R. C. Calfee (Eds.), Handbook of educational psychology (pp. 85

–113). New York: Simon & Schuster Macmillan.

628

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in628 628

10/17/08 10:05:54 AM

REFERENCES

Stipek, D. J., & Daniels, D. H. (1990). Children

‘s use of dispositional attributions in predicting the performance and

behavior of classmates. Journal of Applied Developmental Psychology, 11, 13

–28.

Stipek, D. J., & Gralinski, J. H. (1991). Gender differences in children

‘s achievement-related beliefs and emotional

responses to success and failure in mathematics. Journal of Educational Psychology, 83, 362

–371.

Stipek, D. J., & Gralinski, J. H. (1996). Children

‘s beliefs about intelligence and school performance. Journal of

Educational Psychology, 88, 397

–407.

Stormont, M., Stebbins, M. S., & Holliday, G. (2001). Characteristics and educational support needs of

underrepresented gifted adolescents. Psychology in the Schools, 38, 413

–423.

Strain, P. S., & Danko, C. D. (1995). Caregivers

‘ encouragement of positive interaction between preschoolers

with autism and their siblings. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, 3(1), 2

–12.

Streissguth, A. P., Barr, H. M., Sampson, P. D., Darby, B. L., &

Martin, D. C. (1989). IQ at age 4 in relation to maternal alcohol use and smoking during pregnancy. Developmental
Psychology, 25, 3

–11.

Streissguth, A. P., Sampson, P. D., Barr, H. M., Bookstein, F. L, &

Olson, H. C. (1994). The effects of prenatal exposure to alcohol and tobacco: Contributions from the Seattle
Longitudinal Prospective Study and implications for public policy. In H. L. Neddleman & D. Bellinger (Eds.),
Prenatal exposure to toxicants: Developmental consequences (pp. 148

–183). Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University

Press.

Streitmatter, J. L. (1989). Identity development and academic achievement in early adolescence. Journal of Early

Adolescence, 9, 99

–111.

Sullivan, M. A., & O

’Leary, S. G. (1990). Maintenance following reward and cost token programs. Behavior Therapy,

21, 139

–149.

Sullivan, T. N., Farrell, A. D., & Kliewer, W. (2006). Peer victimization in early adolescence: Association

between physical and relational victimization and drug use, aggression, and delinquent behaviors among urban
middle school students. Development and Psychopathology, 18, 119

–137.

Sun, Y., & Li, Y. (2002). Children

‘s well-being during parents‘ marital disruption process: A pooled time-series

analysis. Journal of Marriage and Family, 64(2), 472

–488.

Suzuki, L. A., & Valencia, R. R. (1997). Race-ethnicity and measured intelligence. American Psychologist, 52(10),

1103

–1114.

Swan, A. (1993). Helping children who stutter: What teachers need to know. Childhood Education, 69(3), 138

–141.

Swanson, J. M. (1992). School-based assessments and interventions for ADHD students. Irvine, CA: K. C.

Publishing.

Swanson, J. M., Kraemer, H. C., Hinshaw, S. P., Arnold, L. E.,

Conners, C. K., Abikoff, H. B., et al. (2001). Clinical relevance of the primary

ﬁndings of the MTA: Success rates

based on severity of ADHD and ODD symptoms at the end of treatment. Journal of the American Academy of Child
and Adolescent Psychiatry, 40, 1

–12.

Swanson, T. C. (2005). 20 ways to provide structure for children with learning and behavior problems. Intervention in

School and Clinic, 40 (3), 182

–187.

Swift, J. N., & Gooding, C. T. (1983). Interaction of wait time feedback and questioning instruction on middle school

science teaching. Journal of Research in Science Teaching, 20, 721

–730.

Swinkels, S. H. N., Dietz, C., Van Daalen, E., Kershof, I. H. G. M.,

Van Engeland, H., & Buitelaar, J. K. (2006). Screening for autism spectrum disorders in children aged 14 to 15
months. I: The development of the Early Screening of Autistic Traits Questionnaire (ESAT). Journal of
Autism and Developmental Disorders, 36, 723

–732.

Sykes, G. (1996). Reform of and as professional development.

Phi Delta Kappan, 77(7), 464

–467.

Sze, S. (2005). Cognitive, affective, and relational dimensions of middle school students: Implications for improving

discipline and instruction. Clearing House, 79(1), 40

–4.

Tafa, E. M. (2002). Corporal punishment: The brutal face of Botswana

‘s authoritarian schools. Educational Review,

54, 17

–26.

Tager-Flusberg, H. (1997). Putting words together: Morphology and syntax in the preschool years. In J.

Berko Gleason (Ed.), The development of language (4th ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

Tam, V. C. W., & Lam, R. S. Y. (2003). Parenting style of Chinese fathers in Hong Kong: Correlates with

children

‘s school-related performance. International Journal of Adolescent Medicine and Health, 15(1),

–62.

Tamis-LeMonda, C. S., Bornstein, M. H., & Baumwell, L. (2001).

Maternal responsiveness and children

‘s achievement of language milestones. Child Development, 72(3), 748–767.

Tangney, J. P. (2001). Constructive and destructive aspects of shame and guilt. In A. C. Bohart, & D. J. Stipek

(Eds.), Constructive and destructive behavior: Implications for family, school, and society, (pp. 127

–145).

Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.

Tanner, J. M. (1978). Fetus into man. Cambridge, MA: Harvard

University Press.

Tashiro, A., Makino, H., & Gage, F. H. (2007). Experience-speci

ﬁc functional modiﬁcation of the

dentate gyrus through adult neurogenesis: A critical period during an immature stage. Journal of
Neuroscience, 27(13), 3252

–3259.

Taube, K. (1997). Critical thinking ability and disposition as factors of performance on a written critical thinking test.

Journal of General Education, 46(2), 129

–164.

Taylor, B. A., & Levin, L. (1998). Teaching a student with autism to make verbal initiations: Effects of a tactile

prompt. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 31, 651

–654.

Taylor, O. (1977). Sociolinguistic dimension in standardized testing. In M. Saville-Troike (Ed.), Georgetown

University Roundtable on Language and Linguistics (pp. 257

–266). Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press.

references

629

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in629 629

10/17/08 10:05:56 AM

REFERENCES

Taylor, R. L., Sternberg, L., & Richards, S. B. (1995). Exceptional children: Integrating research and teaching

(2nd ed.). San Diego, CA: Singular.

Temple, E., et al. (2003). Neural de

ﬁcits in children with dyslexia ameliorated by behavioral remediation: Evidence

from functional MRI. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA, 100, 2860

–2865.

Terman, L. M. (1959). Genetic studies of genius: The gifted group at mid

–life. Stanford, CA: Stanford University

Press.

Tharp, R. G. (1989). Psychocultural variables and constants: Effects on teaching and learning in schools. American

Psychologist, 44, 349

–359.

Tharp, R. G., & Gallimore, R. (1988). Rousing minds to life: Teaching, learning, and schooling in social context.

Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.

Thelen, E., & Smith, L. B. (1998). Dynamic systems theories. In

W. Damon (Ed.-in-chief) and R. M. Lerner (Vol. Ed.), Handbook of child psychology: Vol. 1. Theoretical models of

human development. New York: Wiley.

Thomas, A., & Chess, S. (1977). Temperament and Development.

New York: Bruner/Mazel.

Thomas, E. L., & Robinson, H. A. (1972). Improving reading in every class: A sourcebook for teachers. Boston:

Allyn & Bacon.

Thomas, R. M. (2005). High stakes testing: Coping with collateral damage. Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Thomas, R. M., Hotsenpiller, G., & Peterson, D. A. (2006). Acute psychosocial stress reduces cell survival in adult

hippocampul neurogenesis without altering proliferation. Journal of Neuroscience, 27(11), 2734

–2743.

Thompson, J. G. (2002). First-year teacher

’s survival kit: Ready to use strategies, tools, and activities for meeting

the challenges of each school day. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.

Thompson, P. M., Giedd, J. N., Woods, R. P., MacDonald, D.,

Evans, A. C., & Toga, A. W. (2000). Growth patterns in the developing brain detected by using continuum
mechanical tensor maps. Nature, 404, 190

–193.

Thompson, R. A. (1998). Early sociopersonaility development.

In W. Damon (Series Ed.) & N. Eisenberg (Vol. Ed.), Handbook of child psychology: Vol. 3. Social, emotional, and
personality development (5th ed.). New York: Wiley.

Thorkildsen, T. A., & Nicholls, J. G. (1998). Fifth graders

‘ achievement orientations and beliefs: Individual and

classroom differences. Journal of Educational Psychology, 90, 179

–201.

Thorndike, E. L. (1898). Animal intelligence: An experimental study of the associate processes in animals.

Psychological Review Monograph Supplement, 2, 1

–8.

Thorndike, E. L. (1923). The in

ﬂuence of ﬁrst-year Latin upon the ability to read English. School and Society, 17,

l65

–l68.

Thorndike, E. L. (1924). Mental discipline in high school studies.

Journal of Educational Psychology, 15, 1

–22, 83–98.

Thornton, C. A., & Toohey, M. A. (1985). Basic math facts:

Guidelines for teaching and learning. Learning Disabilities Focus, 1(1), 44

–57.

Thurstone, L. L. (1938). Primary mental abilities. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Thurstone, L. L. (1947). Multiple-factor analysis. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Tippets, E., & Benson, J. (1989). The effect of item arrangement on test anxiety. Applied Measurement in

Education, 2, 289

–296.

Tisak, M. S., Tisak, J., & Goldstein, S. E. (2006). Aggression, delinquency, and morality: A social-cognitive

perspective. In M. Killen & J. Smetana (Eds.), Handbook of moral development. Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Tishman, S., Jay, E., & Perkins, D. N. (1992). Teaching thinking dispositions: From transmission to enculturation.

Theory into Practice. In press.

Tishman, S., Perkins, D. N., & Jay, E. (1995). The thinking classroom: Learning and teaching in culture of thinking.

Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

Tobias, S. (1992). The impact of test anxiety cognition in school learning. In K. A. Hagtvet & T. B. Johnsen (Eds.),

Advances in test anxiety research, Vol. 7 (pp. 18

–31). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger.

Tobin, K. (1987). The role of wait time in higher cognitive level learning. Review of Educational Research, 57(1),

–95.

Tollefson, N. (2000). Classroom applications of cognitive theories of motivation. Educational Psychology

Review, 12(1), 63

–83.

Tombari, M., & Borich, G. (1999). Authentic assessment in the classroom: Applications and practice. Upper Saddle

River, NJ: Merrill.

Tomlinson, C. (2005). Quality curriculum and instruction for highly able students. Theory into Practice,

44(2), 160

–166.

Topman, R., Kleijn, W., van der Ploeg, H., & Masset, E. (1992).

Test anxiety, cognitions, study habits and academic performance: A prospective study. In K. Hagtvet &
T. Johnsen (Eds.), Advances in test anxiety research. Vol. 7 (pp. 239

–259). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger.

Toppino, T. C., Kasserman, J. E., & Mracek, W. A. (1991). The effect of spacing repetitions on the recognition

memory of young children and adults. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 51, 123

–138.

Torff, B. (2005). Developmental changes in teachers

‘ beliefs about critical thinking activities. Journal of

Educational Psychology, 97(1), 13

–22.

Torgesen, J. K., & Mathes, P. G. (2000). A basic guide to understanding and teaching phonological awareness.

Austin, TX: Pro-Ed.

Torgesen, J. K., Wagner, R. K., & Rashotte, C. A. (1997). Prevention and remediation of severe reading

disabilities: Keeping the end in mind. Scienti

ﬁc Studies of Reading, 1(3), 217–234.

Torgesen, J. K., Wagner, R. K., & Rashotte, C. A. (1999). Test of word reading ef

ﬁciency. Austin, TX: Pro-Ed.

Torp, L., & Sage, S. (2002). Problems as possibilities: Problem-based learning for K

–16 education (2nd ed.,

pp. 15

–16). Alexandria, VA: Association of Supervision and Curriculum Development.

Torrance, E. P. (1974). Torrance tests of creative thinking. Lexington, MA: Personal Press. Treatment for

Adolescents

630

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in630 630

10/17/08 10:05:57 AM

REFERENCES

with Depression Study Team. (2004). Fluoxetine, cognitive-behavioral therapy, and their combination for
adolescents with depression: Treatment for Adolescents with Depressions Study (TADS) randomized
controlled trial. Journal of the American Medical Association, 292, 807

–820.

Triona. L. M., & Klahr, D. (2003). Point and click or grab and heft:

Comparing the in

ﬂuence of physical and virtual instructional materials on elementary students‘ ability to design

experiments. Cognition and Instruction, 21, 149

–173.

Trumbull, E., & Farr, B. (2000). Grading and reporting student progress in an age of standards. Norwood, MA:

Christopher-Gordon.

Tsang, C. L. (1989). Informal assessment of Asian Americans:

A cultural and linguistic mismatch? In B. Gifford (Ed.), Test policy and test performance: Education, language, and
culture (pp. 231

–254). Boston: Kluwer Academic.

Tschannen-Moran, M., Woolfolk Hoy, A., & Hoy, W. K. (1998).

Teacher ef

ﬁcacy: Its meaning and measure. Review of Educational Research, 68, 202–248.

Tudge, J., & Scrimsher, S. (2003). Lev S. Vygotsky on education: A cultural

–historical interpersonal, and individual

approach to development. In B. J. Zimmerman & D. H. Schunk (Eds.), Educational psychology: A century of
contributions (pp. 207

–228). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Turiel, E. (1983). The development of social knowledge: Morality and convention. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
Turnbull, A. P., & Turnbull, H. R. (2001). Families, professionals, and exceptionality: Collaborating for

empowerment (4th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Merrill/Prentice Hall.

Turnbull, R., Turnbull, A., Shank, M., Smith, S., & Leal, D. (2002).

Exceptional lives: Special education in today

’s schools (3rd ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Merrill/Prentice

Hall.

Turner, J., & Paris, S. G. (1995). How literacy tasks in

ﬂuence children‘s motivation for literacy. Reading

Teacher, 48(8), 662

–673.

Turner, J., Thorpe, P., & Meyer, D. (1998). Students

‘ reports of motivation and negative affect: A theoretical and

empirical analysis. Journal of Educational Psychology, 90, 758

–771.

Turner, M. A. (1999). Annotation: Repetitive behaviour in autism: A review of psychological research. Journal of

Child Psychology and Psychiatry and Allied Disciplines, 40, 839

–849.

Tuss, P., Zimmer, J., & Ho, H. (1995). Causal attributions of underachieving fourth grade students in China,

Japan, and the United States. Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology, 26, 408

–425.

Twenge, J. M., & Campbell, W. K. (2002). Self-esteem and socioeconomic status: A meta-analytic review.

Personality and Social Psychology Review, 6, 59

–71.

U.S. Department of Education. (1983). A nation at risk: The imperative for educational reform. Available at

http://www
.ed.gov/pubs/NatAtRisk/index.html.

U.S. Department of Education. (2005). Twenty-seventh annual report to Congress on the implementation of the

Individuals with Disabilities Education Act, 2005, Vol. 1. Of

ﬁce of Special

Education and Rehabilitative Services. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Of

ﬁce.

U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Administration on Children, Youth, and Families. (2006).

Child maltreatment 2004: Reports from the states to the National Child Abuse and Neglect Data System.
Washington, DC: Government Printing Of

ﬁce.

Unsworth, N., & Engle, R. W. (2007). The nature of individual differences in working memory capacity: Active

maintenance in primary memory and controlled search from secondary memory. Psychological Review, 114(1),
104

–132.

Urdan, T., Midgley, C., & Anderman, E. M. (1998). The role of classroom goal structure in students

‘ use of

self-handicapping strategies. American Educational Research Journal, 35(1), 101

–122.

Vagg, P., & Spielberger, C. (1995). Treatment of test anxiety: Application of the transactional process model. In C.

Spielberger & P. Vagg (Eds.), Test anxiety: Theory, assessment, and treatment (pp. 197

–215). Washington, DC:

Taylor & Francis.

Vaillancourt, T., & Hymel, S. (2006). Aggression and social status: The moderating roles of sex and peer-valued

characteristics. Aggressive Behavior, 32, 396

–408.

Valentine, J. C., DuBois, D. L., & Cooper, H. (2004). The relation between self-beliefs and academic

achievement: A meta-analytic review. Educational Psychologist, 39, 111

–133.

Valeski, T., & Stipek, D. (2001). Young children

‘s feelings about school. Child Development, 72(4), 1198–1213.

Vallerand, R., Gauvin, L., & Halliwell, W. (1986). Negative effects of competition on children

‘s intrinsic motivation.

Journal of Social Psychology, 126, 649

–657.

Vandewater, E. A., & Lansford, J. E. (1998). In

ﬂuences of family structure and parental conﬂict on children‘s

well-being. Family Relations, 47(4), 323

–330.

Van Houten, R., Nau, P. A., MacKenzie-Keating, S. E., Sameoto,

D., & Colavecchia, B. (1982). An analysis of some variables in

ﬂuencing the effectiveness of reprimands. Journal

of Applied Behavior Analysis, 15, 65

–83.

van Laar, C. (2000). The paradox of low academic achievement but high self-esteem in African American students:

An attributional account. Educational Psychology Review, 12(1), 33

–61.

Van Meter, P., Yokoi, L., & Pressley, M. (1994). College students

‘ theory of note-taking derived from their

perceptions of note-taking. Journal of Educational Psychology, 86, 323

–338.

Van Overwalle, F., & De Metsenaere, M. (1990). The effects of attribution-based intervention and study strategy

training on academic achievement in college freshmen. British Journal of Educational Psychology, 60, 299

–311.

Vansteenkiste, M., Lens, W., & Deci, E. L. (2006). Intrinsic versus extrinsic goal contents in self-determination

theory: Another look at the quality of academic motivation. Educational Psychologist, 41(1), 19

–31.

Vansteenkiste, M., Lens, W., Dewitte, S., De Witte, H., & Deci,

E. L. (2004). The

―why‖ and ―why not‖ of job search behavior:

references

631

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in631 631

10/17/08 10:05:59 AM

REFERENCES

Their relation to searching, unemployment experience and well

–being. European Journal of Social

Psychology, 34, 345

–363.

VanTassel-Baska, J. (1992). Planning effective curriculum for gifted learners. Denver, CO: Love Publishing.

VanTassel-Baska, J. (1998). Excellence in educating gifted and talented learners (3rd ed.). Denver, CO: Love

Publishing.

Veenman, S. (1995). Cognitive and noncognitive effects of multigrade and multiage classes: A best

–evidence

synthesis. Review of Educational Research, 65(4), 319

–381.

Veenman, S. (1997). Combination classrooms revisited. Educational Research and Evaluation, 3(3), 262

–276.

Verhulst, F. C. (2001). Community and epidemiological aspects of anxiety disorders in children. In W. K. Silverman &

P. D. A. Treffers (Eds.), Anxiety disorders in children and adolescents: Research, assessment, and intervention
(pp. 293

–312). New York: Cambridge University Press.

Verzoni, K. A. ( 1995). Creating simulations: Expressing life-situated relationships in terms of algebraic

equations. Paper presented at the Annual Meeting of the Northeastern Educational Research Association,
Ellenville, NY.

Villa, R. A., & Thousand, J. (2000). Restructuring for caring and effective education. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes.
Volkmar, F. R., Szatmari, P., & Sparrow, S. S. (1993). Sex differences in pervasive developmental disorders.

Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 23, 579

–591.

Vygotsky, L. S. (1962). Thought and language. Cambridge, MA:

MIT Press.

Vygotsky, L. S. (1978). Mind in society: The development of higher psychological processes. Cambridge,

MA: Harvard University Press.

Vygotsky, L. S. (1987). The collected works of L. S. Vygotsky:

Vol. 1. Problems of general psychology (R. W. Rieber, & A. S. Carton, Vol. Eds.; N. Minick, Trans.). New York:
Plenum.

Vygotsky, L. S. (1993). The collected works of L. S. Vygotsky: Vol.

2. The fundamentals of defectology (abnormal psychology and learning disabilities). (R. W. Rieber, & A. S. Carton,
Vol. Eds.;
N. Minick, Trans.). New York: Plenum. (Chapters originally written between 1924 and 1935)

Vygotsky, L. S. (1994). The problem of the environment. In

R. van der Veer & J. Valsiner (Eds.), The Vygostsky reader (pp. 338

–354). Oxford, UK: Blackwell.

(Originally published in 1935)

Vygotsky, L. S. (1998). The collected works of L. S. Vygotsky: Vol.

5. Child psychology (R. W. Rieber, Vol Ed.; M. J. Hall, Trans.). New York: Plenum. (Chapters originally
written between 1930 and 1934)

Wade, S. E. (2001). Research on importance and interest: Implications for curriculum development and future

research. Educational Psychology Review, 8, 243

–261.

Wagner, R. K., Torgesen, J. K., & Rashotte, C. A. (1994). The development of reading-related phonological

processing abilities: New evidence of bi-directional causality from a latent
variable longitudinal study. Developmental Psychology, 30, 73

–87.

Walker, H. M., Colvin, G., & Ramsey, E. (1995). Antisocial behavior in schools: Strategies and best practices.

Paci

ﬁc Grove, CA: Brooks/Cole.

Walker, J., & Shea, T. (1995). Behavior management: A practical approach for educators (6th ed.). Englewood Cliffs,

NJ: Merrill.

Walker, J. E., Shea, T. M., & Bauer, A. M. (2004). Behavior management: A practical approach for educators (8th

ed.). New Jersey: Pearson.

Walker, J. M. T., & Hoover-Dempsey, K. V. (2006). Research on parental involvement important to classroom

management. In C. M. Evertson & C. S. Weinstein (Eds.), Handbook of classroom management: Research,
practice, and contemporary Issues. Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Walker, L., de Vries, B., & Trevethan, S. D. (1987). Moral stages and moral orientations in real-life and hypothetical

dilemmas. Child Development, 58(3), 842

–858.

Walker, L. J. (2006). Gender and morality. In M. Killen & J. Smetana (Eds.), Handbook of moral development

(pp. 93

–115). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Wallas, G. (1926). The art of thought. New York: Harcourt Brace.
Wallis, C., & Steptoe, S. (December 10, 2006). How to bring our schools out of the 20th century. Time Magazine.
Waltman, K. K., & Frisbie, D. A. (1994). Parents understanding of their children

‘s report cards. Applied

Measurement in Education, 2, 223

–240.

Warren-Leubecker, A., & Bohannon, J. N. (1983). The effects of verbal feedback and listener type on the speech

of pre-school children. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 35, 540

–548.

Warring, D., Johnson, D., Maruyama, G., & Johnson, R. (1985).

Impact of different types of cooperative learning on cross-ethnic and cross-sex relationships. Journal of
Educational Psychology, 77(1), 53

–59.

Waschbusch, D. A. (2002). A meta-analytic examination of co-morbid hyperactive-impulsive-attention problems and

conduct problems. Psychological Bulletin, 128, 118

–150.

Waslick, B., & Greenhill, L. (1997). Attention-de

ﬁcit/hyperactivity disorder. In J. M. Weiner (Ed.), Textbook of child

and adolescent psychiatry (2nd ed., pp. 389

–410). Washington, DC: American Academy of Child and

Adolescent Psychiatry, American Psychiatric Press.

Waters, J., & Sroufe, L. A. (1983). Social competence as a developmental construct. Developmental Review, 3,

–97.

Watkins, M. J. (1979). Engrams as cuegrams and forgetting as cue overload: A cueing approach to the structure of

memory. In C. R. Puff (Ed.), Memory and organization structure (pp. 173

–195). New York: Academic Press.

Watson, J. B. (1913). Psychology as the behaviorist views it. Psychological Review, 20, 158

–177.

Watson, J. B., & Rayner, R. (1920). Conditioned emotional reactions. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 3, 1

–14.

632

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in632 632

10/17/08 10:06:01 AM

REFERENCES

Watson, M., & Ecken, L. (2003). Learning to trust: Transforming dif

ﬁcult elementary classrooms through

developmental discipline. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.

Watts, G. H., & Anderson, R. C. (1971). Effects of three types of inserted questions on learning from prose. Journal

of Educational Psychology, 62, 387

–394.

Weasmer, J., & Woods, A. (2001). Encouraging student decision making. Kappa Delta Pi Record, 38, 40

–42.

Webb, N. M. (1984). Sex differences in interaction and achievement in cooperative small groups. Journal of

Educational Psychology, 74, 475

–484.

Webb, N. M. (1985). Gender differences in small group interaction and achievement in high- and low-achieving

classes. In L. C. Wilkinson & C. B. Marrett (Eds.), Gender differences in classroom interaction (pp. 209

–236). New

York: Academic Press.

Webb, N. M. (1989). Peer interaction and learning in small groups. International Journal of

Educational Research, 13, 21

–39.

Webb, N. M. (1991). Task-related verbal interaction and mathematics learning in small groups. Journal of Research

in Mathematics Education, 22, 366

–369.

Webb, N. M., & Palincsar, A. S. (1996). Group processes in the classroom. In D. C. Berliner & R. C. Calfee (Eds.),

Handbook of educational psychology (pp. 841

–873). New York: Prentice Hall.

Weber, W. A., & Roff, L. A. (1983). A review of teacher education literature on classroom management. In W. A.

Weber,
L. A. Roff, J. Crawford, & C. Robinson (Eds.). Classroom management: Reviews of the teacher education and
research literature (pp. 7

–42). Princeton, NJ: Educational Testing Service.

Webster-Stratton, C., & Lindsay, D. W. (1999). Social competence and conduct problems in young children: Issues

in assessment. Journal of Clinical Child Psychology, 28, 25

–43.

Webster-Stratton, C., Reid, M. J., & Hammond, M. (2001). Preventing conduct problems, promoting social

competence: A parent and teacher training partnership in Head Start. Journal of Clinical Child Psychology, 30,
283

–302.

Wechsler, D. (2003). WISC

–IV administration and scoring manual. San Antonio, TX: Psychological Corporation.

Weiner, B. (1982). An attributionally based theory of motivation and emotion: Focus, range, and issues. In N. T.

Feather (Ed.), Expectations and actions. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Weiner, B. (1990). History of motivational research in education. Journal of Educational Psychology, 82(4), 616

–622.

Weiner, B. (1992). Human motivation: Metaphors, theories and research. Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
Weiner, B. (1994). Integrating social and personal theories of achievement striving. Review of Educational

Research, 64, 557

–573.

Weiner, B. (2000). Intrapersonal and interpersonal theories of motivation from an attributional perspective.

Educational Psychology Review, 12, 1

–14.

Weinstein, C. E., & Mayer, R. E. (1986). The teaching of learning strategies. In M. C. Wittrock (Ed.), Handbook of

research on teaching (3rd ed.). New York: Macmillan.

Weinstein, C. S. (2003). Secondary classroom management:

Lessons from research and practive (2nd ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill.

Weinstein, C. S., & Mignano, A. J. (2003). Elementary classroom management: Lessons from research and

practice (3rd ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill.

Weinstein, R. (1993). Children

‘s knowledge of differential treatment in school: Implications for motivation. In T.

Tomlinson (Ed.), Motivating students to learn: Overcoming barriers to high achievement (pp. 197

–224). Berkeley,

CA: McCutchan.

Weinstein, R., Madison, S., & Kuklinski, M. (1995). Raising expectations in schooling: Obstacles and

opportunities for change. American Educational Research Journal, 32, 121

–159.

Weinstein, R. S. (1993). Children

‘s knowledge of differential treatment in school: Implications for

motivation. In T. M. Tomlinson (Ed.), Motivating students to learn: Overcoming barriers to high
achievement (pp. 197

–224). Berkeley, CA: McCutchan.

Weir, E., & Bianchet, S. (2004). Developmental dys

ﬂuency:

Early intervention is key. Canadian Medical Association Journal, 170(12), 1790

–1791.

Weiss, B., Harris, V., Catron, T., & Han, S. S. (2003). Ef

ﬁcacy of the RECAP intervention program for children with

concurrent internalizing and externalizing problems. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 71, 364

–374.

Weiss, M., & Weiss, G. (2002). Attention de

ﬁcit hyperactivity disorder. In M. Lewis (Ed.), Child and adolescent

psychiatry: A comprehensive textbook (3rd ed., pp. 645

–670). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.

Weissberg, R. P., & Greenberg, M. T. (1998). School and community competence-enhancement and prevention

programs. In W. Damen (Series Ed.) & I. E. Sigel & K. A. Renninger (Vol. Eds.), Handbook of child psychology:
Vol. 4. Child psychology in practice (5th ed., pp. 877

–954). New York: Wiley.

Weissberg, R. P., Resnik, H., Payton, J., & O

’Brien, M. (2003).

Evaluating social and emotional learning programs. Educational Leadership, 46

–50.

Weldin, D. J., & Tumarkin, S. R. (1999). Parent involvement:

More power in the portfolio process. Childhood Education, 75, 90

–96.

Weller, E. B., Weller, R. A., Rowan, A. B., & Svadjian, H. (2002).

Depressive disorders in children and adolescents. In M. Lewis (Ed.), Child and adolescent psychiatry: A
comprehensive textbook (3rd ed., pp. 767

–781). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.

Weller, L. D. (2001). Building validity and reliability into classroom tests. NASSP Bulletin, 85, 32

–37.

Wentzel, K. R. (1991). Social competence at school: Relationship of social responsibility and academic achievement.

Review of Educational Research, 61, 1

–24.

Wentzel, K. R. (1997). Student motivation in middle school: The role of perceived pedagogical caring. Journal of

Educational Psychology, 89(3), 411

–419.

Wentzel, K. R. (2003). Motivating students to behave in socially competent ways. Theory into Practice, 42(4),

319

–326.

references

633

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in633 633

10/17/08 10:06:03 AM

REFERENCES

Wentzel, K. R. (2003). School adjustment. In W. M. Reynolds &

G. E. Miller (Eds.), Handbook of psychology, Vol. 7. Educational psychology (pp. 235

–258). Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.

Werner, N. E., & Crick, N. R. (2004). Maladaptive peer relationships and the development of relational and

physical aggression during middle childhood. Social Development, 13(4), 495

–514.

Westberg, K. L., Archambault, F. X. Jr., Dobyns, S. M., & Salvin,

T. J. (1993). An observational study of instructional and curricular practices used with gifted and talented
students in regular classrooms (research monograph 93104). Storrs, CT: National Research Center on the Gifted
and Talented, University of Connecticut.

Westwood, P. (2003). Commonsense methods for children with special educational needs: Strategies for the regular

classroom (4th ed.). New York: RoutledgeFalmer.

Wheelcock, A. (1992). The case for untracking. Educational

Leadership, 50(2), 6

–10.

White, K. R. (1982). The relation between socioeconomic status and academic achievement. Psychological

Bulletin, 91, 461

–481.

White, L., & Genesee, F. (1996). How native is near-native? The issue of ultimate attainment in adult second

language acquisition. Second Language Research, 12, 233

–265.

White, R. W. (1959). Motivation reconsidered: The concept of competence. Psychological Review, 66, 297

–333.

Whitmore, J. R., & Maker, C. J. (1985). Intellectual giftedness in disabled persons. Rockville, MD: Aspen Press.
Wig

ﬁeld, A. (1994). Expectancy-value theory of achievement motivation: A developmental perspective. Educational

Psychology Review, 6, 49

–78.

Wig

ﬁeld, A., & Eccles, J. (1992). The development of achievement task values: A theoretical analysis.

Developmental Review, 12, 265

–310.

Wig

ﬁeld, A., & Eccles, J. (1994). Children‘s competence beliefs, achievement values, and general self-esteem:

Change across elementary and middle school. Journal of Early Adolescence, 14, 107

–137.

Wig

ﬁeld, A., Eccles, J., Yoon, K., Harold, R., Arbreton, A., Freedman-Doan, C., & Blumenfeld, P. (1997).

Changes in children

‘s competence beliefs and subjective task values across the elementary school years: A

three-year study. Journal of Educational Psychology, 89(3), 451

–469.

Wig

ﬁeld, A., & Eccles, J. S. (1989). Test anxiety in elementary and secondary students. Educational Psychologist,

24, 159

–183.

Wig

ﬁeld, A., & Eccles, J. S. (2000). Expectancy-value theory of achievement motivation. Contemporary Educational

Psychology, 25, 68

–81.

Wig

ﬁeld, A., & Eccles, J. S. (2002). The development of competence beliefs, expectancies for success, and

achievement values from childhood through adolescence. In A. Wig

ﬁeld &

J. S. Eccles (Eds.), Development of achievement motivation (pp. 91

–120). San Diego, CA: Academic Press.

Wig

ﬁeld, A., Eccles, J. S., MacIver, D., & Reuman, D. A. (1991).

Transitions during early adolescence: Changes in children

‘s

domain-speci

ﬁc self-perceptions and general self-esteem across the transition to junior high school.

Developmental Psychology, 27(4), 552

–565.

Wig

ﬁeld, A., Eccles, J. S., Schiefele, U., Roeser, R. W., & Davis-Kean, P. (2006). Development of achievement

motivation. In
W. Damon & R. M. Lerner (Eds.), Handbook of child psychology (pp. 933

–1002). Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.

Wiggins, G. (1998). Educative assessment: Designing assessment to inform and improve student performance. San

Francisco: Jossey-Bass.

Wiggins, G., & McTighe, J. (1998). Understanding by design. Alexandria, VA: Association for Supervision and

Curriculum Development.

Wilkins, J. L. M. (2004). Mathematics and science self-concept:

An internal investigation. Journal of Experimental Education, 72(4), 331

–346.

Willing, R. (1988). Computer simulations: Activating content reading. Journal of Reading, 31(5), 400

–409.

Willingham, D. T. (2004). Cognition: The thinking animal (2nd ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Willingham, D. T., & Lloyd, J. W. (2007). How educational theories can use scienti

ﬁc data. Mind, Brain, and

Education, 1(3), 140

–149.

Wilson, R. A. (2003). Special educational needs in the early years.

New York: RoutledgeFalmer.

Windschitl, M. (2002). Framing constructivism in practice as the negotiation of dilemmas: An analysis of the

conceptual, pedagogical, cultural, and political challenges facing teachers. Review of Educational Research, 72,
131

–175.

Wing, C., & Scholnick, E. (1981). Children

‘s comprehension of pragmatic concepts expressed in ―because,‖

―although,‖ ―if‖ and ―unless.‖ Journal of Child Language, 8, 347–365.

Winick, M. (1984). Nutrition and brain development. In M. Winick (Ed.), Nutrition in the 20th century (pp. 71

–86). New

York: Wiley.

Wink, J., & Putney, L. (2002). A vision of Vygotsky. Boston: Allyn

& Bacon.

Winn, W. (1991). Learning from maps and diagrams. Educational

Psychology Review, 3, 211

–247.

Winner, E. (1996). Gifted children: Myths and realities. New

York: Basic Books.

Winner, E. (2000). The origins and ends of giftedness. American

Psychologist, 55(1), 159

–169.

Winston, J. S., Strange, B. A., O

’Doherty, & Dolan, R. J. (2002).

Automatic and intentional brain responses during evaluation of trustworthiness of faces. Nature Neuroscience, 5,
277

–283.

Winzer, M., & Grigg, N. (1992). Educational psychology in the

Canadian classroom. Scarborough, ON: Prentice Hall Canada.

Wixted, J. T., & Ebbesen, E. B. (1991). On the form of forgetting.

Psychological Science, 2, 409

–415.

Wolf, D., Bixby, J., Glenn, J. III, & Gardner, H. (1991). To use their minds well: New forms of student assessment.

Review of Research in Education, 17, 31

–74.

634

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in634 634

10/29/08 9:49:06 AM

REFERENCES

Wolters, C. (2004). Advancing achievement goal theory: Using goal structures and goal orientations to

predict students

‘ motivation, cognition, and achievement. Journal of Educational Psychology, 96, 236–250.

Woltz, D. J., & Was, C. A. (2007). Available but unattended conceptual information in working memory: Temporarily

active semantic content or persistent memory for prior operations? Journal of Experimental Psychology: Learning,
Memory, and Cognition, 33(1), 155

–168.

Wolvin, A., & Coakley, C. (1985). Listening. Dubuque, IA: William C. Brown.

Wong, H. K., & Wong, R. T. (1998). How to be an effective teacher: The

ﬁrst days of school. Mountain

View, CA: Harry K. Wong.

Wood, D. J. (1989). Social interaction as tutoring. In M. H. Born-stein & J. S. Bruner (Eds.), Interaction in human

development. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

Wood, D. J., Bruner, J. S., & Ross, G. (1976). The role of tutoring in problem solving. Journal of Child Psychology

and Psychiatry, 17, 89

–100.

Wood, J. (2006). Effect of anxiety reduction on children

‘s school performance and social adjustment. Developmental

Psychology, 42(2), 345

–349.

Woodward, J., & Baxter, J. (1997). The effects of an innovative approach to mathematics on academically

low-achieving students in inclusive settings. Exceptional Children, 63, 373

–388.

Woolfolk, A. E., & Brooks, D. M. (1985). The in

ﬂuence of teachers‘ nonverbal behaviors on students‘ perceptions

and performance. Elementary School Journal, 85, 513

–528.

Woolfolk, A. E., & Hoy, W. K. (1990). Prospective teachers

‘ sense of efﬁcacy and beliefs about control. Journal of

Educational Psychology, 82, 81

–91.

Xie, H., Cairns, B. D., & Cairns, R. B. (2005). The development of aggressive behaviors among girls: Measurement

issues, social functions, and differential trajectories. In D. J. Pepler,
K. C. Madsen, C. Webster, & K. S. Levene (Eds.), The development and treatment of girlhood aggression.
Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Yairi, E., & Ambrose, N. (2005). Early childhood stuttering: For clinicians by clinicians. Austin, TX: Pro-Ed.
Yarrow, M. R., & Waxler, C. Z. (1975). The emergence and functions of prosocial behaviour in young

children. Paper presented at the meeting of the Society for Research in Child Development, Denver.

Yont, K., Hewitt, L., & Miccio, A. (2002).

―What did you say?‖:

Understanding conversational breakdowns in children with speech and language impairments. Clinical Linguistics,
16(4), 265

–285.

Youniss, J., McLellan, J. A., & Strouse, D. (1994).

―We‘re popular, but we‘re not snobs‖: Adolescents describe their

crowds. In
R. Montemayor, G. R. Adams, & T. P. Gullotta (Eds.), Personal relationships during adolescence. Thousand Oaks,
CA: Sage.

Yung, B. H. W. (2001). Three views of fairness in a school-based assessment scheme of practical work in

biology. International Journal of Science Education, 23, 985

–1005.

Zatz, S., & Chassin, L. (1985). Cognitions of test-anxious children under naturalistic test-taking conditions. Journal of

Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 53, 393

–401.

Zeidner, M. (1998). Text anxiety: The state of the art. New York:

Plenum.

Zeidner, M., & Nevo, B. (1992). Test anxiety in examinees in a college admissions testing situation: Incidence,

dimensionality, and cognitive correlates. In K. Hagtvet & T. Johnsen (Eds.), Advances in test anxiety research, Vol.
7 (pp. 288

–303). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger.

Zentall, S. S. (1993). Research on the educational implications of attention de

ﬁcit hyperactivity disorder. Exceptional

Children, 60, 143

–153.

Zhu, X., & Simon, H. A. (1987). Learning mathematics from examples and by doing. Cognition and Instruction, 4,

137

–166.

Zigler, E., & Berman, W. (1983). Discerning the future of early childhood intervention. American Psychologist, 38,

894

–906.

Zigler, E., & Gilman, E. (1998). The legacy of Jean Piaget. In

G. A. Kimble & M. Wertheimer (Eds.), Portraits of pioneers in psychology (pp. 145

–160). Washington, DC:

American Psychological Association.

Zigler, E., Hodapp, R. M., & Edison, M. R. (1990). From theory to practice in the care and education of mentally

retarded individuals. American Journal on Mental Retardation, 95, 1

–12.

Zimmer-Gembeck, M. J., Geiger, T. C., & Crick, N. R. (2005). Relational and physical aggression, prosocial

behavior, and peer relations: Gender moderation and bidirectional associations. Journal of Early Adolescence,
25(4), 421

–452.

Zimmerman, B. J. (1998). Academic studying and the development of personal skill: A self-regulatory perspective.

Educational Psychologist, 33(3), 73

–86.

Zimmerman, B. J. (2000). Self-ef

ﬁcacy: An essential motive to learn. Contemporary Educational Psychology, 25,

–91.

Zimmerman, B. J. (2001). Theories of self-regulated learning and academic achievement: An overview and

analysis. In
B. J. Zimmerman & D. H. Schunk (Eds.), Self-regulated learning and academic achievement: Theoretical
perspectives (2nd ed., pp. 1

–38). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Zimmerman, B. J., Bandura, A., & Martinez-Pons, M. (1992).

Self-motivation for academic attainment: The role of self-ef

ﬁcacy beliefs and personal goal setting. American

Educational Research Journal, 29, 663

–676.

Zimmerman, B. J., & Kitsantas, A. (1997). Developmental phases in self-regulation: Shifting from

progress to outcome goals. Journal of Educational Psychology, 89, 29

–36.

Zimmerman, B. J., & Martinez-Pons, M. (1990). Student differences in self-regulated learning: Relating grade, sex,

and

references

635

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in635 635

10/17/08 10:06:07 AM

REFERENCES

giftedness to self-ef

ﬁcacy and strategy use. Journal of Educational Psychology, 82, 51–59.

Zimmerman, B. J., & Schunk, D. J. (2001). Self-regulated learning and academic achievement: Theoretical

perspectives (2nd ed.). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Zins, J. E., Bloodworth, M. R., Weissberg, R. P., & Wahlberg, H. J.

(2004). The scienti

ﬁc base linking social and emotional learning to school success. In J. Zins, M. Bloodworth, R.

Weissberg, & H. Wahlberg (Eds.), Building academic success on social and emotional learning: What does the
research say? (pp. 3

–22). New York: Teachers College Press.

Zins, J. E., Elias, M. J., Greenberg, M. Y., & Weissberg, R. P.

(2000). Promoting social and emotional competence in children. In K. M. Minke & G. C. Bear (Eds.), Preventing

school problems

—promoting school success: Strategies and programs that work (pp. 71–99). Washington, DC:

National Association of School psychologists.

Zohar, A., & Dori, Y. J. (2003). Higher order thinking skills and low achieving students: Are they mutually exclusive?

Journal of the Learning Sciences, 12(2), 145

–181.

636

references

boh7850x_References.p.579-636.in636 636

10/17/08 10:06:09 AM